FC9000 SERIES

CUTTING PLOTTER

USER’S MANUAL
MANUAL NO.FC9000-UM-151
 Preface
Thank you for choosing a Graphtec FC9000 Series Cutting Plotter. The FC9000 Series Cutting Plotters employ
a digital servo drive system to achieve high-speed and high-precision cutting. In addition to cutting marking film
and other media, an FC9000 series plotter can also be used as a pen plotter. To ensure high cutting quality and
optimal productivity, be sure to read this User's Manual thoroughly prior to use.

Notes on this Manual

(1) No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any
means, without the prior written permission of Graphtec Corporation.
(2) The product specifications and other information in this manual are subject to change without notice.
(3) While every effort has been made to provide complete and accurate information, please contact your sales
representative or nearest Graphtec vendor if you find any unclear or erroneous information or wish to make
other comments or suggestions.
(4) Not with standing the stipulations in the preceding paragraph, Graphtec Corporation assumes no liability for
damages resulting from either the use of the information contained herein or the use of the product.

Registered Trademarks
All names of companies, brands, logotypes, and products appearing in this manual are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Copyright
This User's Manual is copyrighted by Graphtec Corporation.

I
 About the words and phrases in this text
• In this instruction manual, the word "plot" refers to operating the machine and using either the plotting pen or the
cutter pen to cut.

• In this instruction manual, the word "media" refers to paper, roll media, sheet media, or marking film.

Prior to use
• Be sure to read the attached TO ENSURE SAFE AND CORRECT USE prior to use. Otherwise, it may cause an
unexpected accident or fire.

II
 Special Precautions on Handling Blades
Sharp cutter blades are used with this plotter. Handle the cutter blades and holders with care to prevent bodily
injury.

Cutter Blades
Cutter blades are very sharp. While handling a cutter blade or cutter pen, be careful to avoid cutting your fingers
or other parts of your body. Promptly return used blades to the cutter case provided.

Blade tip

For the used blade, put it in the supplied cutter blade case and discard them in accordance with the local
regulations.

Cutter plungers
The tip consists of a sharp blade. Be sure not to extend it too far. Moreover, when you are not using the cutter
plungers, make sure that the blade is fully retracted.

Cutter blade

After Mounting the Cutter Plungers

After the power has been turned on, and during operation, do not touch the pen tip. It is dangerous.

III
 After Turning on the Plotter
During the course of turning on the plotter, be sure to observe the following precautions. The tool carriage and
loaded media may suddenly move during the cutting operation, immediately afterward and when setting the
plotter's functions. Keep hands, hair, clothing and other objects out of the vicinity of the tool carriage, grit rollers
and loaded media. To prevent operator injury and poor cutting results, be careful not to allow hands, hair, clothing
or other foreign objects to become entangled with the tool carriage or loaded media while the plotter is operating.

Machine Caution Label

The Caution Label is located on the machine. Be sure to observe all the cautions on the label.

Notes on the Stand

Be sure to use only the stand designed for the FC9000 Series with your FC9000 Series plotter. The use of a
different stand may cause a plotter malfunction or bodily injury.

Notes on the basket

If the dedicated basket is not used, problems may occur in cutting quality. Be sure to use the dedicated basket.

IV
 Notes on the paper (media)
Please use the paper (media) in accordance with the following precautions.

• The paper is sensitive to temperature and humidity, and can start to stretch or contract immediately upon
removal from the roll. Cutting/plotting the media immediately after taking it off causes it to stretch and may blur
or cause deviations in the images.

• Please make sure to store the paper at the same environment (temperature/humidity) as this machine.

• Please always line up the edge of the paper.

Misalignment may cause paper skewing and cutting deviations.
Paper skewing can cause plotting deviation and cutoffs.

• About the end of the roll media and the paper roll:
The cutting or plotting may differ depending on how the roll media ended or how the paper roll was stopped.

• About the paper roll:

This machine uses rolls with an internal diameter of 3 inches, or 76.2 mm. Mis-cuts or plotting deviations may
occur if the paper roll is warped or has a larger internal diameter.

• Please make sure to use the Pre Feed function. (When setting AP mode)
The media can start to stretch or contract after it is taken off the roll.
Changes in temperature and/or humidity affect the paper’s contractile and saturation time, and may cause
deviations of cutting or plotting.
In order to reduce this effect, be sure to try this function on media to be used.

• About the use of thin media (70 g /m2 or less)

If the cutting speed is fast, there may be paper skewing. In that case, please lower the cutting speed.
Especially when using in low humidity environment, please use lower cutting speed.

Precautions when using the curled media

• Especially upward curl will cause media jam even with weak curl.

• Please use uncurled media, or rework to make it curl weak downward to the extent that follows the plotter.

Notes on the specifications and accessories

Specifications and accessories depend on the sales area. For details, please contact your dealer.

V
WARNING

The United States Federal Communications Commission has specified that the following notice must be
brought to the attention of users of this product.

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.

USE SHIELDED CABLES

To comply with FCC Class A requirements, all external data interface cables and connectors must be
properly shielded and grounded. Proper cables and connectors are available from GRAPHTEC’s authorized
dealers or manufacturers of computers or peripherals. GRAPHTEC is not responsible for any interference
caused by using cables and connectors other than those recommended or by unauthorized changes or
modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.

VI
 Installation space
Please secure a space for installation as according to the below illustration.

CAUTION

Frontward and backward the machine, please take enough space for operation.

100 mm

600 mm 600 mm

500 mm
Frontward

Top view

VII
 Selecting a power cable
Be sure to refer to the following tables if you wish to use a cable other than the one supplied as an
accessory.
Table 1. 100 V to 120 V Power Supply Voltage Range

Supply Voltage Reference

Plug Configuration Plug Type Power Cable
Selector Settings Standards
ANSI C73.11 UL Listed
North America NEMA 5-15
125 V 100/120 V UL498/817/62 Type SJT
10 A CSA22.2 No.18AWG × 3
NO.42/21/49 300 V, 10 A

Table 2. 200 V to 240 V Power Supply Voltage Range

Supply Voltage Reference

Plug Configuration Plug Type Power Cable
Selector Settings Standards

Europe CEE(7)VII
TYPE: H05VV-F
250 V 200 V IEC320
3 × 1.0 mm2
10 A CEE13

UK BS1363
TYPE: H05VV-F
250 V 200 V BS4491
3 × 1.0 mm2
5A BS6500

Australia AS3112
TYPE: OD3CFC
250 V 200 V AS3109
3 × 1.0 mm2
10 A AS3191

UL Listed
North America ANSI C73.20
Type SJT
250 V 200 V NEMA 6-15
No.18AWG × 3
15 A UL 198.6
300 V, 10 A

Switzerland SEV1011
TYPE: H05VV-F
250 V 200 V SEV1004
3 × 0.75 mm2
6A SEV1012

GB15934
China
GB2099.1 TYPE: H05VV-F
250 V 200 V
GB1002 3 × 1.0 mm2
6A
GB/T 5023.5

VIII
 CONTENTS
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
Notes on this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
Registered Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
About the words and phrases in this text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
Prior to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
Special Precautions on Handling Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
Cutter Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
Cutter plungers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
After Mounting the Cutter Plungers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
After Turning on the Plotter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV
Machine Caution Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV
Notes on the Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV
Notes on the basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV
Notes on the paper (media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V
Precautions when using the curled media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V
Notes on the specifications and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V
WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO
FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI
USE SHIELDED CABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI
Installation space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII
Selecting a power cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII

Chapter 1: Product Summary

1.1 Checking the Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Dedicated accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Front view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3 Assembling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Mounting the stock shafts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.4 Connecting to the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Chapter 2: Preparing to Cut

2.1 Preparation of Cutter Plunger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Cutter plunger nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Structure of cutter plunger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Adjusting the blade length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Blade application and features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2 Attaching a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Attaching a tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Removing the tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

C-1
 2.3 Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Loading roll media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Loading sheet media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4 Aligning the Push Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Aligning the push roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
When feeding long media (2 meters or more) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
When feeding long media (2 meters or less) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
When narrow media (160 mm or less) is used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Changing the hold-down force. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.5 About the Default Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.6 Connecting to the Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.7 How to Use Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Operation key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Reading the screen (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Contents of Operation from MENU Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Operation from [COND/TEST] key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.8 Setting Feeding Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.9 Pre Feed of Media (Paper or Marking Film) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.10 Selecting Tool Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Selecting the TOOL CONDITION number (Condition No.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Setting the tool condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Setting the tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Setting the speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Setting the force. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Setting the acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Setting tool No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Adjust the blade length manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.11 Running Cutting Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Cutting test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
To make 1 cut with set value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
To make 3 cuts with set value and ±1 of set value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Confirm the results of the cutting test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Adjustment of Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Adjustment for Half Cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Adjustment for cutting out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Adjustment when using plotting pen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Adjust the blade length (Automatic Height Adjust). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.12 Displaying Cutting Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Chapter 3: Basic Operations

3.1 Raise or Lower the Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Move the Tool Carriage and Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Move in steps manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Continuously move manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Setting step movement distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Move away the tool carriage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

C-2
 Change the cutting condition (Condition No.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Reset (Revert to the initial state when the power was turned on.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3 Setting the Origin Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
When coordinate axes rotation are set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
When coordinate axes are rotated after origin point is set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Setting origin point when HP-GL is set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.4 Setting the Cutting Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5 Stop Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Pause and resume cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Stop cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Chapter 4: Convenient Functions

4.1 Settings for Cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Setting cutting area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Setting cutting width (EXPAND). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Setting length of the page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Setting mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Set the enlarge/shrink scale (Scale). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2 Copy (Duplicate Cutting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
When media change mode is OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
When media change mode is ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
When Media Change Mode is OFF and Cross Cut is ON.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.3 Panel Cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4 Cross Cut Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.5 Dual Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
User Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Chapter 5: ARMS (Advanced Registration Mark Sensing System)

5.1 Outline of ARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Shape (Pattern) of the Registration Mark and Origin Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Scan range necessary to detect the registration mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Positioning of the media and the registration mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Cutting area when adjusting the registration mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Automatic detection of registration mark position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Media that registration mark cannot be detected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2 Setting and Adjustment of ARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Set the MARK SCAN Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Checking the recommended setting of registration mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Check the lines of registration mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Test the registration mark sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Adjusting for the registration mark scan position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Adjust after plotting the adjustment registration mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Detect the registration mark for adjustment on the media and enter the value. . . . . . . . . 5-20
Setting the registration mark automatic detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Setting speed of the registration mark scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Set cross cut between registration marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

C-3
Chapter 6: Manual Position Adjust
6.1 Outline of Manual Position Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Setting mark scan mode and number of adjustment marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Adjust with 2POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Adjust with 3POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adjust with 4POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2 Manual Position Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Chapter 7: Setting Regarding Cutting Quality

7.1 Cutting the Corner of Thick Media Sharp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Outline of tangential mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Setting the tangential mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Setting the length of overcut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Setting of the Initial Down Force. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2 Setting the Step Pass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3 Setting the Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.4 Setting the Distance Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.5 Setting Cut Line Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.6 Setting Initial Blade Control Position Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.7 Setting the OFFSET FORCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.8 Setting Adjustment Between the Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
In the case of Tool 1 - Tool 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Between tools 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.9 Cross cut the roll paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Cut Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Manually cross-cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Automatically cross-cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Chapter 8: Settings Regarding Cutting Time

8.1 Sorting the Cutting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Cut Data is Received. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3 Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Media is Set (Initial Feed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.4 Setting Feed Speed for Pre Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.5 Setting the MOVING SPEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.6 Setting the Tool Up Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.7 Setting the Tool Up Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Chapter 9: Setting Regarding Interface

9.1 Setting Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
USB interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Network (LAN) interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
RS-232C interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2 Clearing the Buffer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

C-4
 9.3 I/F (LAN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Setting the DHCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Set IP address, subnet mask, gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4 Connecting with RS-232C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Switching the setting number you want to use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Changing/storing the RS-232C setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Chapter 10: Settings Regarding Operation Environment

10-1 Related to menu display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Display language setting (LANGUAGE SELECTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Display Length Unit Setting (LENGTH UNIT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-2 Related to sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Enabling/Disabling the media sensors (MEDIA SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Enabling/Disabling the push roller sensors (PUSH ROLLER SENSOR). . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10-3 Related to plotter environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Fan suction setting (FAN POWER). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Enabling/Disabling the beep setting (BEEP FOR KEY OPERATION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Low Movement Speed Setting by POSITION key (POSI. KEY SPEED + SLOW KEY). 10-9
High Movement Speed Setting by POSITION key (POSI. KEY SPEED). . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Pause key select setting (PAUSE/MENU KEY SETTING). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
LCD contrast setting (LCD CONTRAST). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Chapter 11: Settings of Controls from Computer

11-1 Related to command processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Setting the command (COMMAND). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Priority of tool condition selection (CONDITION PRIORITY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11-2 Related to GP-GL command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Setting the step size (GP-GL STEP SIZE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Enabling/Disabling the ' : ' and ' ; ' commands (COMMAND ' : ', ' ; '). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Moving the pen while raised or lowered in
Response to the 'W' command (COMMAND 'W') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11-3 Related to HP-GL command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Model ID response (HP-GL MODEL EMULATED). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Circle-command resolution setting (CIRCLE RESOLUTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Chapter 12: Data Link

12.1 Select Connection Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2 Data Link with USB Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3 Output with a BarCode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.4 Start Mark Auto Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.5 Communication Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.6 Skew Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12

Chapter 13: Apparel (AP) Mode

13.1 Apparel (AP) Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2 Overview of Axis Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Alignment mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

C-5
 Example of axis adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.3 Adjusting Coordinate Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Setting axis alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Starting point setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.4 Set F Command of Cutting (F_CUT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.5 Cutting a CUT DEMO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.6 Setting a Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.7 Setting a Separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
GP-GL separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
HP-GL separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.8 Offline Output from USB Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.9 Running Cutting Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Cutting test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Confirm the results of the cut test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Adjustment of offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Adjustment when using cutter plunger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Adjustment when using plotting pen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13.10 Cross Cut Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13.11 Setting Rear Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
13.12 Setting the Number of Pre Feeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
13.13 Setting Paper Exposure Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28

Chapter 14: Cutting with supplied application software

14.1 Basic operation of printing and cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Graphtec Pro Studio / Cutting Master 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Graphtec Studio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14.2 Basic operation of barcode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Graphtec Pro Studio / Cutting Master 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.3 Application of barcode cutting (continuous operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
Graphtec Pro Studio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23

Chapter 15: Maintenance

15.1 Daily Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Daily maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Storing the plotter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.2 Replacing Cutter Blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.3 Cleaning the Cutter Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
15.4 Cutter Plunger Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
15.5 Setting the Alarm for Degree of Wear (BLADE WEAR ALARM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15.6 Replacing the Cross Cut Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11

Chapter 16: Troubleshooting

16.1 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
When the plotter does not operate after turning the power on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

C-6
 When it does not work right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
When the Cutting Result is Not Good. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Error Messages in GP-GL Command Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Error Messages in HP-GL Command Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
ARMS Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Other Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Caution Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
16.2 Printing the Setting of the Plotter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
16.3 Creating Test Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
16.4 Creating CUTTING PRO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
16.5 Confirm the Cutting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
16.6 Self Diagnostic Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-24
Reading the error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-26

Chapter 17: Option

17.1 Pouncing (Punch Continuous Holes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Attaching the Pouncing Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Removing the Pouncing Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Setting the Pouncing Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
17.2 2-Pen Assignment (Switching the Tools). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Attaching a tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Removing the tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Attaching a pen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Removing a pen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7

Chapter 18: Take-up

18.1 Precautions (Take-up). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Notes on the basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Note on the media (paper). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Notes on plotting data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18.2 Nomenclature (Take-up). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
18.3 Preparation for plotting/cutting (Take-up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Loading roll media (paper). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Preparing for take-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
Set the take-up function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18.4 Troubleshooting (take-up). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Take-up operation is not performed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Media take-up is skewed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Abnormal noise occurs during operation of the take-up roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Take-up operation is performed arbitrarily. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
Roll media is loosely taken up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
18.5 Appendix (Take-up). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
External Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22

C-7
Appendix
A.1 Main Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Options and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 External Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.4 Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.5 Initial Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Chapter 1: Product Summary
This chapter explains how to connect this machine to your computer.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
1.1 Checking the Accessories
1.2 Nomenclature
1.3 Assembling
1.4 Connecting to the Computer

1-1
1.1 Checking the Accessories

Accessories
Item Q'ty Item Q'ty
Power cable 1 pc. USB cable 1 pc.

DVD 1 pc. SETUP MANUAL 1 of each

TO ENSURE SAFE AND CORRECT USE Cutter
Blade Manual

• Various software
• User's Manual (pdf)

Cutter plunger (PHP33-CB09N-HS) 1 pc. Cutter blades (CB09UB (1P)) 1 pc.

Water-based fiber pen adapter (PHP31-FIBER) 1 set Water-based fiber pen (KF700-BK [1P]) 1 pc.

* Plunger/Height adjustment tool.

Cutter blade adjustment magnifier (PM-CT-001) 1 pc. Flange set (OPH-A21) 1 set

Software Activation Code 1 sht.

* In addition, various information may be attached.

* Accessories may vary depending on the sales area.
* For details, please contact the distributor where you purchased.

1-2
Dedicated accessories
A stand (with a basket) is supplied.
* Dedicated accessories may be different.

1-3
1.2 Nomenclature

Front view
This section explains in the FC9000-140.

Cutting mat Grit roller position guide Tool carriage Tool holder

Cutting groove Pen holder

Cross cut unit

Media sensors Pen station

Control panel
Media set lever
Grit rollers

Power switch

Media stopper

Push rollers

Power switch ���������������������������Used to turn the plotter on and off.

Control panel ���������������������������Used to access various plotter functions.
Push rollers �����������������������������Rollers that push the media against the grit rollers.
Grit rollers �������������������������������Feeds the media back and forth.
Media sensors ������������������������The front sensor is used to sense the leading edge of the media. The rear
sensor is used to sense the trailing edge of the media.
Tool carriage ���������������������������Moves the cutter-pen or plotting pen across the media during cutting or
plotting.
Tool holder ������������������������������Holds the cutter-pen or plotting pen and moves it up or down.
Grit roller position guide �������A roller position guide is affixed to the front side of the rail, which shows the
position of each grit roller. Use these alignment marks as an aid in locating the
Push rollers.
Cutting mat �����������������������������The cutter blade moves on this cutting mat.
Cutting groove ������������������������Use this groove to cut out (die cut) or cross cut.
Media set lever �����������������������Used to raise or lower the Push rollers during the loading or unloading of
media.
Media stopper �������������������������This stops the stock shaft from spinning when setting in media. It is utilized
when pulling roll media straight out.

1-4
 Cross cut unit �������������������������Used for separating media or for crosscutting.
Pen station/Pen holder (option 2-pen type only)*
�������������������������A second pen is set.
* Pen station is an optional item. For details, please contact your dealer.

Rear view
This will be explained in FC9000-140.

USB memory dedicated

connector Push roller hold-down force
switching lever
RS-232C interface
connector
AC line inlet

USB interface
connector
Network (LAN) interface
connector

Basket
Stock shaft
Media sensors

Stopper Stand
Media stocker

AC line inlet ����������������������������� Inlet where the power cable is connected.

Push roller hold-down force switching lever
�������������������������Switches the hold-down force of the push roller to 3 stages of strong, medium
and weak.
Media stocker �������������������������The stock shaft is set.
Stock shaft ������������������������������A roller that takes in roll media.
Stopper ������������������������������������Keeps set roll media in place.
USB interface connector �������Used to connect the plotter to the computer with a USB interface cable.
RS-232C interface connector
�������������������������Used to connect the plotter to the computer with a RS-232C interface cable.
It depends on the sales area. For details, please contact the distributor where
you purchased.
Network (LAN) Interface connector
�������������������������Used to connect this plotter with a network (LAN) I/F.
USB memory dedicated connector
................................................USB memory dedicated connector.
Stand ���������������������������������������A stand to put the machine on.
Basket �������������������������������������The container for receiving the media.

1-5
1.3 Assembling

Mounting the stock shafts

This will be explained in FC9000-140.

Mounting
1 Set one stopper in the stock shaft.
(Keep the stopper screws slightly loose.)

Stock shaft

Stoppers

2 Slide the stock shaft into the media stocker.

Make sure the stock shaft touches the roller.

Stock shaft

Roller

1-6
1.4 Connecting to the Computer

Connect the plotter to the computer using the interface cable. Use one of the USB ports, the network (LAN)
interface or the RS-232C port to connect the plotter to the computer. Select the port depending on the specification
of the software to be used and the availability of the interface port on the computer.
Please install driver software before connecting.
Depending on the port used, use one of the USB cable (standard accessories), the network (LAN) cable
(commercially available product) or the RS-232C cable (commercially available product) to connect. Use the
cables specified by Graphtec, matching the computer that is to be connected.
This will be explained in FC9000-140.
* RS-232C interface depends on the sales area. For details, please contact the distributor where you purchased.

Connection
1 Check that the power switch is turned off (the " " side is
pressed down).

2 Connect the plotter to the computer using the interface cable.

Supplement
See the "Setting Interface" for setting the
Connection via USB interface interface.
Computer

USB cable
(accessories)

1-7
 Connection via network (LAN) interface
Computer

Network (LAN) cable

(commercially available product)

Connection via RS-232C interface

Computer

RS-232C cable
(commercially available
product)(9-pin female
- 9-pin female straight
connected cable)

1-8
Chapter 2: Preparing to Cut
This chapter describes how to prepare to start the cutting.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
2.1 Preparation of Cutter Plunger
2.2 Attaching a Tool
2.3 Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)
2.4 Aligning the Push Rollers
2.5 About the Default Screen
2.6 Connecting to the Power
2.7 How to Use Control Panel
2.8 Setting Feeding Method
2.9 Pre Feed of Media (Paper or Marking Film)
2.10 Selecting Tool Condition
2.11 Running Cutting Tests
2.12 Displaying Cutting Area

2-1
2.1 Preparation of Cutter Plunger

This chapter describes the structures and types of the cutter plungers (cutter pens).

Cutter plunger nomenclature

The plotter cuts using a cutter blade mounted in a plunger. There are two different plungers to suit the diameter
of the cutter blade to be mounted (the φ0.9 mm cutter plunger is provided as a standard accessory). Be sure to
mount the cutter blade in the corresponding cutter plunger.

PHP33-CB09N-HS/PHP33-CB15N-HS
CAUTION
Cutter blade Plunger
To avoid bodily injury, handle cutter blades with
care.

Blade-length adjustment knob

Plunger-cap
(Blue: For φ0.9 mm-diameter blades)
(Red: For φ1.5 mm-diameter blades)

PHP35-CB09-HS/PHP35-CB15-HS

Cutter blade Plunger

Protective cap Blade-length adjustment knob

(Blue: For φ0.9 mm-diameter blades)
(Red: For φ1.5 mm-diameter blades)

2-2
Structure of cutter plunger
PHP33-CB09N-HS/ PHP35-CB09-HS/
PHP33-CB15N-HS PHP35-CB15-HS

Blade-length adjustment knob Blade-length adjustment knob

(blue) / (red)

Plunger Plunger

Cutter blade Cutter blade

φ0.9 mm / φ1.5 mm diameter φ0.9 mm / φ1.5 mm diameter

Plunger-cap Chuck
(blue) / (red)
Protective cap

Hole

Hole

CAUTION

<PHP33-CB09N-HS/PHP33-CB15N-HS>

• Please fully insert the cutter blade straight into the plunger cap..
If the cutter blade cannot be inserted straight, please insert the cutter blade after pressing the insertion port of the cutter blade
several times.

Insertion port of the cutter blade

If not installed correctly, it may result in damage to the cutter blade or the plotter itself.

<PHP35-CB09-HS/PHP35-CB15-HS>

• Please fully insert the cutter blade straight into the chuck.
If the cutter blade cannot be inserted straight, please insert the cutter blade after pressing the insertion port of the cutter blade
several times.

Insertion port of the cutter blade

If not installed correctly, it may result in damage to the cutter blade or the plotter itself.

2-3
Adjusting the blade length
Blade length needs to be adjusted to perform optimal cut. Perform few test cuts and set the optimal blade length.

CAUTION

• To avoid bodily injury, handle cutter blades with care.

• It may result in damaging the cutter blade or the cutting mat if the blade is extended too much. Make sure the blade length is set less
than the thickness of the media.
After adjustment, please always perform "test cut".

Supplement

• See "Running Cutting Tests" for cutting tests.

• If a thin media such as a film is used, use the supplied magnifier to adjust it.

Adjust the blade length by turning the blade-length adjustment knob. Turn the knob in direction "A" to extend
the blade, or in direction "B" to retract the blade. When the knob is turned by one scale unit, the blade moves
approximately 0.1 mm. One full turn of the knob moves the blade approximately 0.5 mm.

PHP33-CB09N-HS/PHP33-CB15N-HS

Cutter blade moves Scale

approximately 0.1 mm turning
one scale unit
Scale

PHP35-CB09-HS/PHP35-CB15-HS

Scale
Cutter blade moves
approximately 0.1 mm turning
one scale unit Scale

Blade application and features

Select the optimal cutter blade and medium to be cut.
Refer to the Cutter Blade Manual.

CAUTION

To avoid bodily injury, handle cutter blades with care.

2-4
2.2 Attaching a Tool

Attach a tool (cutter plunger, plotter pen) to the plotter.

Attaching a tool
When mounting the tool in the tool holder, please note the following.

• Push the tool all the way into the holder until its flange contacts the upper part of the holder and then tighten

•
the screw firmly.
To prevent injury, avoid absolutely touching the tool immediately after the cutting plotter is turned on or
whenever the tool is moving.
It is explained here using cutter plunger as an example.

CAUTION

When pushing the tool holder with your fingers, the blade tip may be protruding. Take care not to cut your fingers.

Supplement

• When using with half cutting and plotter pen, set the seal in Tool Holder (backward), and when using cutting out (perforated
cut), set the seal in Tool Holder (forward).

• Half cutting means that only the marking film is cut out, leaving the backing sheet uncut.

• Cutting out means that the media is cut out completely.

• Structure of Marking film

Marking film

Backing
sheet

Mounting
1 Loosen the tool holder screw.
Bracket to hold tool Tool holder

Tool holder

Bracket to hold tool

Top

2-5
 2 While pushing up the tool holder, push until its flange
Supplement
completely touches the upper part of the holder.
When using with half cutting and plotter pen, set
the seal in Tool Holder (backward), and when
using cutting out (perforated cut), set the seal in
Tool Holder (forward).

Bracket to hold tool Tool holder

Flange

Tool holder
(Backward: Half cutting/Plotting Pen)

Tool holder
(Forward: Using cutting) Top view

3 Make sure that the tool bracket is engaged on the tool's

flange, and then tighten the screw.
Bracket to hold tool Flange

Removing the tool

When removing the tool, turn it counterclockwise to remove the tool.

2-6
2.3 Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)

Both roll media and sheet media can be used with the FC9000. Load the media according to the instructions given
for each type.
Use the grit roller on the right side of the media (looking from the front) as a guide when setting it in the media
sensor. Afterwards, adjust the push roller so that it's lined up with the side of the media.

• Loading Roll Media

• Loading Sheet Media

Loading roll media

This section explains in the FC9000-140.

Operation
1 Lower the media set lever to raise the push rollers.
Push roller

Media set lever

Media sensor

2 Set the roll media on top of the stock shaft, and then clip the
roll paper with a stopper. Once it’s set, tighten the stopper’s
screws.

2-7
3 Push the tip of the roll media forward from the back of the
FC9000. Make sure to pull it so that there is no slackening
across the roll media's route.

4 Lock the media stopper (Raise while pulling forward) and pull
Supplement
it out evenly so that the roll paper is straight. Please load so
When actually cutting, please release the lock
that the roll paper always rests on the media sensor.
from the media stopper (Pull the media stopper
forward and lower it.).

Media sensors

Lock

Media sensors Media stopper

2-8
5 Position the media and the push rollers to correspond with
the width of the media.

When using FC9000-75

The push rollers push down on either side of the media. Use
Supplement
the grit roller position guide to make sure the push rollers are
set on top of the grit rollers. • The media must always be positioned over
the media sensor.
You can adjust the center push roller's hold-down force.
• See "Aligning the Push Rollers" for the
position of the push rollers.

• See "Aligning the Push Rollers" for information

about push roller hold-down force.

Push roller

Grit roller
Grit roller position guide

Push roller

Media

Media sensor

2-9
When using FC9000-100/140/160
Use the 3 or 4 push rollers to push down the sides and center
Supplement
of the media. Use the grit roller position guide and make sure
the push rollers are on top of the grit rollers. • The media must always be positioned over
the media sensor.
You can adjust the push roller's hold-down force.
• See "Aligning the Push Rollers" for the
position of the push rollers.

• See "Aligning the Push Rollers" for information

about push roller hold-down force.

Push roller

Grit roller position guide

Push roller

Grit roller

Media sensor

(The center push roller is on top of the grit roller.) (The center push roller is on top of the grit roller.)

(The center push roller is not on top of the grit roller.) (The center push roller is near the edge.)

When feeding long media (2 meters or more)

Position the push rollers at least 15 mm inside the edges of
the media.
Push roller

15 mm 15 mm

Media

2-10
 When feeding long media (2 meters or less)
Position the push rollers at least 5 mm inside the edges of
the media.
Push roller

5 mm 5 mm

Media

6 Pull the media taut to make sure that there is no slack in the
conveyance path, and then raise the media set lever to lower
the push rollers.

Media set lever

7 Release the lock from the media stopper (Pull the media
stopper forward and lower it.),

Slide the media

stopper

Media stopper

2-11
8 When the set lever is up (and the media is held down by the
Supplement
push rollers) and the media stopper is unlocked, pull out the
roll media and give it slack. • Dirt from the floor may stick to the media
when giving it slack, so please be careful.
Create the same amount of slack in the media as will be
used for the back of the machine.
• During continuous operation with roll media,
do not make a media slack at the rear of the
cutting plotter.

Give it slack

2-12
Loading sheet media
This will be explained in FC9000-140.

Operation
1 Lower the media set lever to raise the push rollers.
Push roller

Media set lever

Media sensor

2 Make sure that the sheet media completely covers the media
sensor.

Media sensor

Media sensor
Media Set parallel to this hole.

2-13
3 Position the media and the push rollers to correspond with
the width of the media.

When the FC9000-75 Supplement

The push rollers push down on either side of the media. Use • The media must be at least 125 mm in length.

the grit roller position guide to make sure the push rollers are • The media must always be positioned over
set on top of the grit rollers. the media sensor. (For the location of media
sensor, see "Nomenclature".)
You can adjust the center push roller's hold-down force.
Push roller • See "Aligning the Push Rollers" for information
about the position of the push rollers.
Grit roller
Grit roller position guide
• See "Aligning the Push Rollers" for information
about push roller hold-down force.

Push roller

Media

Media sensor

When the FC9000-100/140/160 Supplement

Use the 3 or 4 push rollers to push down the sides and • The media must always be positioned over
the media sensor.
center of the media.
Use the grit roller position guide and make sure the push • See "Aligning the Push Rollers" for information
about the position of the push rollers.
rollers are on top of the grit rollers.
You can adjust the center push roller's hold-down force. • See "Aligning the Push Rollers" for information
about push roller hold-down force.

Push roller

Grit roller position guide

Push roller

Grit roller

Media sensor

(The push roller is on top of the grit roller.) (The push roller is on top of the grit roller.)

(The center push roller is not on top of the grit roller.) (The center push roller is near the edge.)

2-14
4 Set straight parallel to the hole of the guide.
Raise the set lever to fix the position of the push roller and
the sheet media.

Media set lever

Media Set parallel to this hole.

2-15
2.4 Aligning the Push Rollers

This section describes how to alignment of the push rollers.

Aligning the push roller

Position the left and right push rollers to correspond with the width of the media. Adjust the push rollers so that
they are positioned above both the media and the grit rollers.
Positioning the push rollers within the grit roller position guides ensures that they are above the grit rollers.

Push roller

Grit roller position guide

(It isn't on the grit roller.) (It isn't on the grit roller.)

Grit roller

CAUTION

To move the push rollers, the media set lever must be in the lowered position.

Supplement
If a [confirming push roller point] message appears after setting the media and raising the media set lever, it means the right push
roller is not on the right grit roller, or that the left or center push roller is not on the proper grit roller. Make sure everything is set
correctly.

When feeding long media (2 meters or more)

Position the push rollers at least 15 mm inside the edges of the media.
Push roller

15 mm 15 mm

Media

2-16
When feeding long media (2 meters or less)
Position the push rollers at least 5 mm inside the edges of the media.
Push roller

5 mm 5 mm

Media

When narrow media (160 mm or less) is used

Make sure that all push rollers are on the long right grit roller. Use the left side of the grit roller as a starting point
and then set the push rollers so that they're on both sides of the media.
The FC9000 can take media width of 50 mm* or more.
* When using FC9000-100/140/160, set it to "NARROW(160MM OR LESS)" in "ADVANCE" - "MEDIA WIDTH".
Please use only 2 push rollers on the right side. The hold-down force switching of the third and subsequent
push rollers should be set to be Low (OFF) and not on the grit roller. (The push roller position is not detected.)
Please set the same hold-down force of the push roller to be used. Move the third and subsequent push rollers
away from the media position.

[3] key

FC9000-75 FC9000-100 FC9000-140/160

Push roller Push roller

Grit roller Grit roller Grit roller

Push roller Push roller Push roller

Media sensor Media sensor Media sensor

Media Media Media

CAUTION

• The media must be at least 125 mm in length in media feed direction.

• The media must always be positioned over the media sensor.

2-17
Changing the hold-down force
The FC9000 requires the push roller hold-down force to be set based on the media's width and material type in
order to keep the media in place.

Switching
(1) Raise the media set lever to lower the push rollers.
(2) Use the push roller hold-down force switching lever on the back of the push roller to adjust the center push
roller's hold-down force. It can be set to Strong, Medium or Low (OFF).
(3) When the push roller hold-down force switching lever is lower, it is in Strong mode. When it is upper it's in
Low (OFF) mode.

Lever Lever Lever

Hold-down force: Low (OFF) Hold-down force: Medium Hold-down force: Strong

CAUTION

• Please switch the hold-down force of the push rollers at both ends to Strong or Medium and keep the same hold-down force.

• If the hold-down force is changed with the media set lever lowered, the lever operation will be heavier. Always raise the media set
lever and then change itch the hold-down force.

Supplement

• Low (OFF) of hold-down force is the standard setting for cutting thin film like car film.

• Switch the hold-down force as necessary for different types of media.

2-18
Assignment
The hold-down force of push rollers on both ends (left/right) should set to the same force in Strong or Medium.
However, when using three or more push rollers, set the hold-down force of the push rollers inside both ends to
lower than both ends.
When using two push rollers

GOOD
Strong Strong Medium Medium

NG
When right and left
hold-down forces are Strong Medium Medium Low Strong Low Low Low
different

When using three push rollers

GOOD
Strong Medium Strong Medium Medium Medium Medium Low Medium

NG All other than above

When three hold-down
forces are different

When using four push rollers

GOOD
Medium Medium Medium Medium Strong Medium Medium Strong

Medium Low Low Medium

NG All other than above

When three hold-down
forces are different

2-19
2.5 About the Default Screen

The Initial Setup Screen appears only when powering up the machine for the first time after purchase. Here, you
can set the display language and length unit.
Also, after setup, you can select the menu even from the READY status.
See "Display Language Setting (LANGUAGE SELECTION)" and "Display Length Unit Setting (LENGTH UNIT)" in
Chapter 10".
See "2.6 Connecting to the Power" for turning on the power.

Operation
1 Once the machine is powered on (with the " | " switch) a
message will be displayed after the version is displayed.
Here, LANGUAGE setting screen is displayed.

2 Use the POSITION ( ) keys to select the language.

(This manual assumes you chose the English language
setting.)

3 Press the [ENTER] key.

After the DISPLAY LANGUAGE is selected, the LENGTH UNIT screen
will appear.

4 Press the [1] key (METRIC) or the [2] key (INCH) to select the
length unit setting.

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key.

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to default screen.

2-20
2.6 Connecting to the Power

Turning on the power of the plotter.

Operation
1 Check that the power switch is turned off. (the " " side is
pressed down)

2 Connect one end of the provided power cord to the FC9000

AC line inlet and the other end to an electrical socket of the
rated supply voltage.

3 Turn on the FC9000 by pressing the "|" side of the switch.

Supplement
LCD on the control panel is lit.
When turning the power off, wait over 20
seconds before turning it on again, otherwise
problems may occur with the display.

4 If media has not been loaded, the firmware version number is

Supplement
displayed, followed by a prompt to load media.
• The Default Screen will appear after
purchasing the machine. See "2.5 About the
Default Screen" for more information.

• This screen is described as "default screen"

in this document.
Media set lever lowered
(The push roller is up)
Media set lever raised
(The push roller is down) • Settings such as initial media feed speed and
communication conditions can be performed.

2-21
2.7 How to Use Control Panel

This section explains the function of lamps and keys on the control panel.
BARCODE PAUSE/MENU PAUSE/MENU
[2] key [1] key key lamp key

ORIGIN key

COPY key

ESC/CROSS CUT key

ENTER key

Screen (LCD) [3] key [4] key SLOW key POSITION key COND./TEST key

Indicator lamp
PAUSE/MENU lamp
���������������������������� When in MENU mode, the lamp lights up.

Operation key
BARCODE ������������������ The continuous operation start screen of data link will be displayed. In Apparel (AP)
Mode, it is disabled.
PAUSE/MENU ������������ Switches to the MENU mode.
It will go into MENU mode if it is pressed once, and MENU mode will be turned off when
it is pressed again.
Different function are set in the MENU mode.
When the PAUSE/MENU key is pressed during the operation, the cutting/plotting
operation stops.
ORIGIN ����������������������� It will set the current position as an origin point.
On the READY screen, pressing the [ENTER] and [ORIGIN] keys at the same time will
allow you to reset the machine. (Only in Normal mode)
COPY ������������������������� Copy of data in the buffer memory is output.
ESC/CROSS CUT ������ (ESC): Cancels the setting change and then returns to the previous screen. Returns to
the previous screen in the MENU screen.
(CROSS CUT): In the READY status, detach the media on which cutting/plotting is
completed.
ENTER ����������������������� Saves the settings, and then returns to the setting screen in various function or
CONDITION setting screen of the MENU screen.
On the READY screen, pressing the [ENTER] and [ORIGIN] keys at the same time will
allow you to reset this machine.

2-22
COND/TEST ��������������� Displays the screen to set the tool conditions.
Use this when checking tool conditions to activate a cutting test.
SLOW ������������������������� When pressing the POSITION key at the same time, the tool carriage moves slowly.
When the "SLOW" icon is displayed on the screen, it works as a menu key.
When the [SLOW] key is pressed in the READY screen, the current cutting/plotting area
and the position of tool carriage are displayed.
1, 2, 3, 4 ��������������������� Select the menu number displayed in the screen.
POSITION ( , , , ) key
���������������������������� Adjusts various settings, selects numerical value changes, moves the cursor, and
changes the positions in the MENU screen.

Reading the screen (LCD)

Information reflecting the status will be displayed in the screen of the control panel.
Name of the button and corresponding function are displayed on the screen when a function is allocated to the
button on the control panel. Button name will be displayed in reverse when the button is enabled.
READY screen MENU screen CONDITION setting screen
(READY) (PAUSE/MENU) (COND/TEST)

Media set lever raised Media set lever lowered

Set condition of media (READY status:

It will display "READY" when the media is loaded)

Tool conditions currently used

Display of setting condition

Command : GP-GL : GP-GL Command

HP-GL : HP-GL Command
(No Display) : Command Auto
Step size : 0.1 : 0.1mm
0.05 : 0.05mm
0.025 : 0.025mm
0.01 : 0.01mm
Rotate/Mirror
: R90 : Rotation (Rotate 90°)
User number : Mir : Mirror
R90 Mir : Mirror and Rotate
Tool number currently used Priority : MANUL : Manual priority
PROGRA : Program priority

Corresponding button name of control panel Sort : Sort ON : Display when sort is on
(Valid button is displayed in reverse)
Prefeed : Pre FEED : Display when automatic media feed is on Media

2-23
 Default screen (Ready Screen): READY

The condition number (Cut Condition) that has been set is displayed.

Supplement

• In this manual, this screen is referred as READY screen or READY status.

• In this READY status, you can set the cutting and communication conditions by pressing [PAUSE/MENU] or [COND/TEST] key.

Screen to set the corresponding conditions is displayed when the [PAUSE/MENU] key or [COND/TEST] key are
pressed.
[PAUSE/MENU] [COND/TEST]

It will return to default screen It will return to default screen

when [PAUSE/MENU] key when [COND/TEST] key is
is pressed while displaying pressed while displaying
MENU screen. CONDITION setting screen.

MENU screen CONDITION setting screen

Page number is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen if there are too many settings or selection that
will need multiple pages to display.
Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move to different page.

Page number
[3] key

POSITION ( ) keys

Page number

Example of moving page and operation button

2-24
Icon of the corresponding operation button is displayed in the screen to change the setting values.

Increase or decrease the setting Select the setting by number

value using POSITION ( ) keys (1, 2, 3, 4) or POSITION (
keys. ) keys.
Select the change unit by
[SLOW] key.
Example of screen to change the settings value

Contents of Operation from MENU Screen

MENU screen

Contents of the operation and settings that is displayed in MENU screen with [PAUSE/MENU] key are as
following:
[1] (TOOL) : Set the setting for the operation of the tool.
[2] (ARMS) : Perform settings and operations related to alignment of tool and media, such as automatic
registration mark scanning by ARMS.
[3] (AREA) : Set the settings for area, magnification, rotation, reverse, etc., of the cutting.
[4] (MEDIA) : Set the setting of the condition for the media.
[ ] (IF) : Set the settings of the condition for the interfacing with the computer.
[ ] (ADV.) : Set the conditions for the basic operation of the cutting plotter, such as display language,
unit of the measurements and sensor.
[ ] (TEST) : Does the operation necessary for maintenance, such as self diagnostic test or printout of
the condition settings list.
[ ] (LINK) : Performs operations necessary for output such as data link.
[PAUSE/MENU] : MENU screen will be closed and return to default screen.
[SLOW] : Displays the position key screen. When media is set, the tool point can be moved

See the "Menu Tree" in the Appendix A.4 for list of the descriptions about each settings.

2-25
Operation from [COND/TEST] key

CONDITION setting screen (1-3)

The [COND/TEST] key brings up the SETTING screens, where you can change the media type and tool
conditions.
Up to 8 CONDITION settings can be saved with different settings in numbers 1 through 8.

[COND/TEST] : This will clear the CONDITION setting screen and return to default screen.

See "Selecting Tool Condition" for the detailed tool condition.

2-26
2.8 Setting Feeding Method

Feeding method for the loaded media is set.

Operation
1 If you have already loaded the media, the MEDIA TYPE
CAUTION
menu appears. Select the media type to suit the loaded
Before doing the media set selection, make sure
media.
to release the media lock.

Supplement

• The CONTINUE menu parameter appears

when the media set lever is raised and then
lowered again after media was previously
loaded, making it possible to select the
For the roll media, check that the media stopper is unlocked previous settings.
and then select a media type on the MEDIA SELECT screen.
When pressing the [4] key to select
“CONTINUE”.

Media stopper

When using the same media without changing

the position of the media, the CONTINUE
function enables the continued use of the
plotting area, pen position and origin position
Release the
media stopper that were specified before the media set lever
Pull the media stopper was lowered. If the current media is the same
forward and lower it. size as the last media that was loaded, the
plotter does not detect the media's edges.

When selecting [ROLL-1 FRONT EDGE] pressing the [1] key

Select this when you have loaded a roll media and you wish
to start cutting or plotting from the leading edge.
The width and leading edge of the roll media are detected.

When selecting [ROLL-2 CURRENT POSITION] pressing the [2] key

Select this when you have loaded a roll media and you wish
to start cutting or plotting from a point beyond the leading
edge.
Only the width of the roll media is detected.

When pressing the [3] key to select [SHEET]

Select this when a cut sheet has been loaded. The width,
leading edge, and trailing edge of the sheet are detected.

2-27
2 After the media is detected, the plotter is ready to receive
Supplement
data for cutting or plotting. This status is called "READY
The screen below shows that the plotter is
status" of the default screen.
currently detecting media.
When setting is finished, the tool carriage's location will
become the initial point.
If the interface or command settings have not been made,
make these settings before sending the data.
If the settings have been made, tool adjustment is performed.
When a rewinding device has been installed,
When the pen adjustments have been made, the plotter is the following is displayed.
ready to start cutting.
Send the cutting or plotting data from the application
software.
Default screen is displayed.

Menu screen

2-28
2.9 Pre Feed of Media (Paper or Marking Film)

The PRE FEED function is used to prevent the loaded media from slipping by automatically advancing the media
the specified length and imprinting it with grit roller marks. This function can also be used to acclimate long media
lengths to the operating environment in order to minimize media expansion and contraction, and to ensure stable
media feed operations.
* When feeding long media 2 meters or more be sure to use the basket (option).

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in READY status.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETING screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the [1] key (PRE FEED).

Supplement
FEED LENGTH setting screen is displayed.

• It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2)

without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

• Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting

digits.

• You can set the range between 0.5 m and 50

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the m.
setting value. • When you select "SHEET" for paper feeding,
pre feed will be not performed.

Supplement
5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key.
When Pre Feed of Media is performed, the
Pre feed will start, and it will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2) .
following screen is displayed.

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

To cancel Pre Feed, press the [SLOW] key

(CANCEL).

2-29
2.10 Selecting Tool Condition

Set the “TOOL CONDITION (CUT CONDITION) No.”, “TOOL”, “OFFSET”, “SPEED”, “FORCE”, and “ACCEL
(ACCELERATION)”.

LCD Display
TOOL CONDITION number currently used

Selected condition

User number

Tool number currently used

Selecting the TOOL CONDITION number (Condition No.)

Eight settings (1 to 8) as the TOOL CONDITION can be stored. Change the setting in accordance with the material
(8 types) to be used by switching the setting.

Operation: Operation with the [COND/TEST] key

1 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the READY status.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (Condition No.).

CONDITION No. selection screen is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the setting

(CONDITION No.).

2-30
 4 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key.
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
(1/3) It will return to CONDITION setting screen
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key before pressing the [ENTER].

5 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen.

Operation: Operation with the [ENTER] key

1 Press the [ENTER] key in the READY status.
CONDITION No. selection screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] to [4] keys, or the POSITION ( ) keys,

while simultaneously pressing the [ENTER] key.

3 Confirm the setting and release the [ENTER] key.

It will return to the default screen.

2-31
Setting the tool condition
This section describes how to make the tool, speed, force and acceleration settings. Before cutting media, the
following four cutter-pen conditions must be specified.
• FORCE
• SPEED
• ACCELERATION
• OFFSET

CAUTION

• It may result to damaging the cutter blade or the cutting mat if the blade is extended too much. Make sure the blade length is set
less than the thickness of the media.

Tool Conditions (Cutter Blade) for Each Media Type

See the Cutter Blade Manual.

Blade Part Nos., Displayed Blade Types, and CUTTER OFFSET Values
See the Cutter Blade Manual.

2-32
Reference Pen Conditions for Plotting Pen
Pen type Part no. Cut/Force Speed (cm/s) Acceleration
Water-based fiber-tip pen KF700 series 10 to 16 30 4
Oil-based ballpoint pen KB700-BK 14 to 24 60 4

To prolong the pen life, set the FORCE to the lowest setting, and set the SPEED after checking to confirm that
there are no faint lines or other problems during plotting.

CAUTION

How to Improve Weeding ability

We recommend that you observe the following points to improve the weeding ability of media.

• Select the correct blade for the application.

See the Cutter Blade Manual.

• Use blades that are not worn.

If the blade is worn, it will not cleanly and the cut results will be difficult to weed.

• Adjust the blade-length and FORCE settings until only traces of the blade are left on the backing sheet.
Specify a FORCE value that is as low as possible, but that still leaves faint traces on the backing sheet.

• Set the SPEED and ACCELERATION values as low as possible.

• Weed the cut results right after cutting has been completed.
If time is allowed to elapse, adhesive along the cut edges will cause the edges to stick together.

• Select media with good Weeding ability.

Recommended film types: 3M Scotchcal Series 7725.
Weeding refers to the removal of un wanted areas of vinyl from the background after the media has been cut.
<Supplement>
Weeding is when excess from the cut media is removed from the blade.

Supplement

• Finish will become coarser, but the cut time is decreased when the settings for the speed and acceleration is set higher.
Especially with the large media, good cut quality might not be achieved by rumbling media. Decrease the values for the speed and
acceleration settings in that case.

• Finish will become good, but the cut time will increase when the settings for the speed and acceleration is set smaller.

2-33
Setting the tool
Set the type and offset value of the tool that is used.

Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the default screen.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the [2] key (TOOL).

TOOL setting screen is displayed. Supplement
Press the [1] key to change the CONDITION No.
It will return to CONDITION setting screen
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

3 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and set the tool.

4 Press the [3] key (OFFSET). Supplement

OFFSET setting screen is displayed.
• What is Offset
It will adjust the difference between the tip
of the blade in the plunger and the center of
the plunger. There are standard adjustment
values for each cutter blades.
Fine adjustment will be made to that standard
values here. (Adjustment will be made with
standard value as 0.)
It is not necessary to set the offset if "PEN",
was selected in the tool settings. (not
displayed)

• Guideline to Set Offset

See the Cutter Blade Manual

• You can set the range between -5 and +5.

The other range is +1 to +45.

• To continue the settings of other tool condition

number, return to step 3 by pressing the [1]
key.

2-34
5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the
setting value.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
(1/3).

7 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen

2-35
Setting the speed
Set the speed of the tool that is used in each of the condition numbers.
Setting range : 1 to10 (in 1 cm/s increment), 10 to 105 (in 5 cm/s increment)

Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the default screen.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the [3] key (SPEED).

Supplement
SPEED setting screen is displayed.
It will return to CONDITION setting screen (1/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

* Display may vary depending on the selected tool condition number.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the tool condition

number (CONDITION No.).

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between 1 and 10 (1 cm/
s-step) or 10 and 105 (5 cm/s-step).

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
(1/3).

6 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

Supplement
It will return to default screen.
Depending on media width, speed and
acceleration settings, the acceleration of the
default screen is displayed as [*].
In this case, it operates with the value of the
calculated acceleration automatically.

2-36
Setting the force
Set the cutting force that is used in each of the condition numbers.
Setting range : 1 to 48

Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the default screen.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (FORCE).

FORCE setting screen is displayed. Supplement
It will return to CONDITION setting screen (1/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

* Display may vary depending on the selected condition number.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the condition

number (CONDITION No.).

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

setting value. Supplement
You can set the range between 1 and 48.

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
(1/3).

6 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen.

2-37
Setting the acceleration
Set the acceleration of the tool that is used in each of the tool condition numbers.
Setting range : 1 to 8

Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the default screen.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

CONDITION setting screen (2/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [1] key (ACCELERATION).

Supplement
ACCELERATION setting screen is displayed.
It will return to CONDITION setting screen (2/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

* Display may vary depending on the selected tool condition number.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the tool condition

number (CONDITION No.).

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between 1 and 8.

2-38
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
(2/3).

7 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

Supplement
It will return to default screen.
Depending on media width, speed and
acceleration settings, the acceleration of the
default screen is displayed as [*].
In this case, It operates with the value of the
calculated acceleration automatically.

2-39
Setting tool No.
Set the tool that is used in each of the tool condition numbers.
Setting range : 1 to 3 (2 is used only for the optional 2-pen type.)

Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the default screen.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

CONDITION setting screen (2/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (ASSIGN TOOL)

Supplement
ASSIGN TOOL setting screen is displayed.
It will return to CONDITION setting screen (2/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

* Display may vary depending on the selected tool condition number.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the tool condition

number (CONDITION No.).

2-40
5 Press the [1] key (1), [2] key (2), or the [3] key (3).
Supplement

• Tool number and installed position

Tool Holder
(Backward: Half cut/Plotter pen)

Tool Holder
(Forward: Cutting out)

Tool 1: When using a tool installed behind

the tool holder
Tool 2: When using a tool attached to the
pen station with the 2-pen option of
this plotter

Tool 3: When using a tool attached in front of

the tool holder

• For information on how to install the tool, see

"Attaching a Tool".

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
(2/3).

7 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen.

2-41
Adjust the blade length manually
Optimal cut is not achieved unless the blade length is adjusted in accordance to the used media and the cutter blade.
Perform further adjustment by performing cutting test after adjusting the blade length manually.

CAUTION

• To avoid bodily injury, handle cutter blades with care.

• It may result to damaging the cutter blade or the cutting mat if the blade is extended too much. Make sure the blade length is set
less than the thickness of the media.

Supplement

• See "Running Cutting Tests" for cutting tests.

• When a thin media such as a film is used, use the supplied magnifier to adjust it.

Operation
1 Align the blade tip to the tip of the cutter pen, and make it
touch the surface of the media.

Blade

Media

2 Extend the blade little by little to the thickness of the media.

Supplement

•
Optimal blade length is less than the thickness of film and
Blade length can be changed by spinning
backing sheet combined, but more than the thickness of the the adjuster on the blade. Spinning it in the A
film. direction pushes it out, while spinning it in the
Try cutting the film, and adjust so there is slight cutting on B direction pulls it in. One scale unit is equal
to 0.1 mm.
the backing sheet. If the backing sheet gets cut completely,
reduce the blade length, and if the film does not get cut Cutter blade moves approximately
0.1 mm turning one scale unit.
completely, increase the blade length.
Scale

Scale
Optimal blade length
Film

•
Thickness of Media
Guideline to Set the Blade Length

Backing Sheet See "Setting the Tool Condition" for the

thickness of the media.
Film

Optimal
blade length Thickness of Media

Backing Sheet

2-42
2.11 Running Cutting Tests

Test cutting can be performed after making the tool, speed, force, and acceleration settings to ensure that the
selected cutting conditions actually produce the desired cutting results. Check how far the blade cuts into the
media and how the corners are being cut. If the cutting results are not satisfactory, adjust the various settings and
repeat the test cutting until the optimal settings are achieved.

Cutting test
Here, you can either cut one test pattern based on the current values, or do three tests with ±1 values added.

To make 1 cut with set value

Operation
1 Load the media for test cutting in the plotter.

2 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the default screen.

CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key (CUT TEST). Supplement

It will return to CONDITION setting screen when
you press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tool carriage

to the location you wish to perform the test cutting. Supplement
Pressing the POSITION and [SLOW] keys at the
same time will move the tool carriage slower.

5 Press the [ENTER] key. CAUTION

1 cut test pattern is cut.
When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the tool
carriage will start moving, so take care not to get
injured by the cutter blade.
6 Press the [ENTER] key after completion.
CONDITION setting screen is displayed.

7 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen.

2-43
To make 3 cuts with set value and ±1 of set value

Operation
1 Load the media for test cutting in the plotter.

2 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the default screen.

CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key (CUT TEST).

Supplement
CUT TEST screen is displayed.
It will return to CONDITION setting screen when
you press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tool carriage

to the location you wish to perform the test cutting. Supplement
Pressing the POSITION and [SLOW] keys at the
same time will move the tool carriage slower.

5 Press the [1] key (FORCE). CAUTION

3 cutting test patterns are cut, with current FORCE in the center, and 1 When the [1] key (FORCE) is pressed, the tool
each of FORCE increased and decreased for 1.
carriage will start moving, so take care not to get
injured by the cutter blade.

Supplement
Test cut patterns can have their cut order and
force changed as shown below.
Cut Order

6 Press the [ENTER] key after completion.

+1 0 -1
It will return to CUT TEST menu screen.

7 Press the [2] key (CUTTER OFFSET). CAUTION

3 cutting test patterns are cut, with current CUTTER OFFSET in the
When the [2] key (CUTTER OFFSET) is
center, and 1 each of CUTTER OFFSET increased and decreased for 1.
pressed, the tool carriage will start moving, so
take care not to get injured by the cutter blade.

8 Press the [ENTER] key after completion.

It will return to CUT TEST menu screen.

2-44
 9 Press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).
It will return to CONDITION setting screen.

10 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen.

Confirm the results of the cutting test

Confirm the cutting test results, and adjust to optimal setting. Repeat cutting test and adjustment until optimal cut
is achieved.

Adjustment of Offset
Check the corners of the triangles and rectangles. See "Setting the
Supplement
Tool Condition" and adjust the offset value if the corner is not cut or
if it is cut too much. How to check offset
Check if the offset value is set correctly by
Adjust the offset value.
following.

Not enough adjustment

Increase the offset value.

Optimal offset value.

Too much adjustment.

Decrease the offset value.

Adjustment for Half Cutting

Peel off the triangle area, and adjust so it cuts slightly into the Supplement
backing sheet.
See "Adjusting the Blade Length" and "Setting
If the backing sheet has been cut through, either the FORCE setting the Force" and adjust the settings.
is too high or the cutter-blade tip is extended too far. If the backing
sheet shows only a few traces of the cutter blade, either the FORCE
setting is too low or the cutter blade tip is not sufficiently extended.

Adjustment for cutting out

Adjust so the media is completely cut out.
If the media is not completely cut, either the FORCE setting is too low or the cutter blade tip is not sufficiently
extended.
See "Adjusting the Blade Length" and "Setting the Force" and adjust the settings.

Adjustment when using plotting pen

Adjust the FORCE so there will be no faint lines. To prolong the pen life, set the FORCE to the lowest setting
without any faint lines. See"Setting the Force" or setting the FORCE.

2-45
Adjust the blade length (Automatic Height Adjust)
Test cutting must be performed several times in order to confirm the optimal blade length setting. However, if the
blade length adjustment function is used, the optimal length can be easily set.

Operation
1 Load the media for test cutting in the plotter.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tool

carriage to the location you wish to perform the blade length
adjustment.

3 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the default screen.

CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

CONDITION setting screen (3/3) is displayed.

5 Press the [4] key (BLADE ADJUST).

Message prompting to turn the blade-length adjustment knob is
displayed.

2-46
6 As instructed, turn the blade length adjustment knob to the
Supplement
left to fully retract the blade.
See "Structure of Cutter Plunger" for blade
length adjustment knob.

Blade

7 Set the cutter plunger in Tool Holder (Backward).

Supplement
Adjustment is only possible for the cutter pen
set in Tool Holder (Backward). It does not apply
to Tool Holder (Forward) . See "Attaching a Tool"
for instructions on setting.

8 Press the [ENTER] key.

The height is calculated by moving the tool up and down.
TO ACHIEVE THE TARFET LENGTH screen is displayed.

9 Press the [1] key (BLADE LENGTH TARGET).

BLADE LENGTH TARGET screen (TARGET) is displayed.

10 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

setting value.

11 Confirm the settings and press the ENTER key (SET).

The Blade Length Target will be selected, and it will return to the TO
ACHIEVE THE TARGET LENGTH screen.

2-47
12 Press the [2] key (CHECK).
Supplement
The height is calculated by moving the tool up and down.
"T" is the target value of the blade length, and
The amount and direction to turn the adjustment knob is displayed. "H" is the current blade height (amount).
Turning the blade-length adjustment knob
displays the number of turns and direction.

13 Turn the blade-length adjustment knob and adjust the cutter

CAUTION
blade length.
Depending on the loaded media, the blade
Current blade length is displayed by pressing the [2] key might sink in to the media, making accurate
(CHECK) , so adjust the blade length until it matches the measurement impossible.
thickness of the media.

14 Press the [ESC] key (END).

Adjustment is completed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
(3/3).

15 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

I will be return to default screen. After completing the settings, press
[ENTER] key.

2-48
2.12 Displaying Cutting Area

Check the width of cutting area.

Operation
1 Press the [SLOW] key in the default screen.
The cutting area is displayed.

When a rewinding device is not installed

When a rewinding device is installed

2 Release the [SLOW] key.

I will be return to default screen.

2-49
Chapter 3: Basic Operations
This chapter describes the basic methods to operate the plotter manually.
All the operations described in this chapter is to start from the READY status (media is set) as a general
condition.
Perform the operation described in this chapter after making the plotter in READY status referring to
previous chapter.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
3.1 Raise or Lower the Tool
3.2 Move the Tool Carriage and Media
3.3 Setting the Origin Point
3.4 Setting the Cutting Direction
3.5 Stop Cutting

3-1
3.1 Raise or Lower the Tool

This is a function to raise or lower the tool (pen).

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING (1/4) screen is displayed.

3 Tool is raised or lowered every time the [1] key (TOOL UP/
DOWN) is pressed.

4 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

3-2
3.2 Move the Tool Carriage and Media

Tool carriage and media can be moved manually using the POSITION key.
It also can move the tool carriage and media to the origin, or move it certain distance to keep it away.

Move in steps manually

It can manually move in steps when the screen is displaying "READY", or when the POSITION ( ) key is
displayed.

Operation
1 Press the POSITION ( ) key once to move in the
Supplement
desired direction.
• It will move in steps every time POSITION (
) key is pressed.

• Distance of step movement can be changed.

See "Setting of Step Movement Distance".
Tool carriage or the media will move toward the direction of the pressed
POSITION key for 1 step.

Continuously move manually

It can manually move continuously when the screen is displaying "READY", or when the POSITION ( )
keys are displayed.

Operation
1 Hold the POSITION ( ) key down to keep moving in the
Supplement
desired direction.
Pressing the POSITION and [SLOW] keys at the
same time will move the tool carriage slower.

Tool carriage or the media keeps on moving continuously in the direction

of the pressed POSITION key.

2 Release the POSITION ( ) key.

Movement of the tool carriage or the media will stop.

3-3
Setting step movement distance
The parameters when setting the cutting direction are determined by the distance of the cutting direction.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the [1] key (MOVE STEP).

MOVE STEP screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (1.0mm) or the [2] key (0.1mm).

Supplement
Value chosen here will be the movement
distance for the step movement.

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (1/4) It will return to ADVANCE screen (1/4) without
screen (1/4).
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

3-4
Move away the tool carriage
It is possible to move the tool carriage toward upper right. It makes it easier to confirm the cutting results if you
perform this operation after the cutting is completed.
<When using Roll Media>: Seen from above

Standby position of the pen

carriage

100 mm

Position of the pen carriage

before moving away

To the bottom of the cutting area

(machine origin point)

<When using Sheet Media>: Seen from above

To the top of the

maximum cutting area

Bottom of the operation area

(machine origin point)

Operation
1 Press the [1] key (TOOL1 VIEW) in READY status. Supplement
Tool carriage will move away. When the tool number setting is set to "1", press
the "TOOL 1 MOVE AWAY", and when set to
"3", press the "TOOL 3 MOVE AWAY".

To move the tool carriage to the origin point, do following:

Operation
1 Press the [2] key (HOME) in READY status.
Tool carriage will move to the origin point.

3-5
Change the cutting condition (Condition No.)
Go through the following steps to change the Cutting Condition (Condition No.):

Operation
1 Press the [ENTER] key in READY status.
CONDITION No. selection screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (No.1), the [2] key (No.2), the [3] key (No.3), Supplement
the [4] key (No.4), the [ ] key (No.5), the [ ] key (No.6), the
It will return to state when the power is turned
[ ] key (No.7), or the [ ] key (No.8), while simultaneously
on when the [ORIGIN] key (RESET) is pressed.
pressing the [ENTER] key.
Please refer to for Reset (Revert to the initial
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to default screen. state when the power was turned on.).

Reset (Revert to the initial state when the power was turned on.)
To revert to the initial state when the power was turned on, do following:

Operation
1 Press the [ENTER] key in READY status.
CONDITION No. selection screen is displayed.

2 Press the [ORIGIN] key (RESET), while simultaneously

pressing the [ENTER] key.
Initialization is performed, and MEDIA SETTING screen is displayed.

3-6
3.3 Setting the Origin Point

Point where the cutting starts is called origin point. The origin point can be set at any location.

New origin
point

Original origin point

How to set the current position to the new origin point

1 Move the tool to the new origin point by pressing the
POSITION ( ) keys when it is in READY status.

2 Press the [ORIGIN] key.

New origin point is confirmed and "NEW ORIGIN POINT IS SET !" is
displayed for few seconds in the screen.

3-7
When coordinate axes rotation are set
If the origin point is moved while the coordinate axes are rotated, the origin point will move as shown below.

Supplement
See "Setting the Cutting Direction" about the rotation of the coordinate axes.

Original origin point

New origin
point

When coordinate axes are rotated after origin point is set

The origin point will be initialized as shown below if the coordinate is rotated after moving the origin point.
Distance "a" will be maintained, but distance "b" will be initialized.

New origin
point

a a
New origin point
b
Original origin Original origin
point point

Before setting After setting

Supplement

• To use the origin point movement and coordinate axes rotation together, always rotate the coordinate axes first, and then move the
origin point.

• Coordinate value displayed after setting new origin point is a distance from the new origin point.

3-8
Setting origin point when HP-GL is set
When using the HP-GL command, the origin point is set to either the lower left of the cutting area or the center.

Supplement

• When using the GP-GL command, this setting does not affect the operation.

• See "Settings of Controls from Computer" for setting the COMMAND.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [3] key (HP-GL ORIGIN POINT).

HP-GL ORIGIN POINT setting screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (LOWER LEFT) or the [2] key (CENTER).

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (1/3). It will return to INTERFACE screen without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to the default screen.

3-9
3.4 Setting the Cutting Direction

Rotate the coordinate axes to change the cutting direction.

Reference
The rotation settings will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Coordinate axes rotation

settings ON
Coordinate axes rotation
settings OFF

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [3] key (AREA).

AREA PARAMETERS screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (ROTATE).

ROTATE screen is displayed.

3-10
4 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

Supplement
5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
It will return to AREA PARAMETERS screen (1/2)
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to AREA PARAMETERS
without changing the settings when you press
screen (1/2).
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

The tool carriage moves to the coordinate position you set.
It will return to default screen.

3-11
3.5 Stop Cutting

It will stop cutting when the [PAUSE/MENU] key is pressed while cutting. Operation selection menu is displayed
on the screen of the control panel while it is stopped. It is possible to choose either to continue or stop the
operation.
It is also possible to exchange or reset the media while it is stopped.

Pause and resume cutting

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
Cutting will stop and following screen is displayed.

2 Perform necessary operation, such as exchanging the

Supplement
media.
There is no effect on the selection of media type
when the media set lever is moved up and down
while pausing the cutting. It is also possible to
exchange or reset the media.

3 Press the [1] key (CONTINUE JOB).

Cutting will start and the screen will resume to operation. Supplement
It will stop cutting by pressing [2] key (QUIT
JOB).
See "Stop Cutting".

3-12
Stop cutting

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
Operation will stop and following screen is displayed.

2 Press the [2] key (QUIT JOB).

Supplement
Following screen is displayed.
It will resume cutting by pressing [1] (CONTINUE
JOB) key.
See "Pause and Resume Cutting".

3 Confirm if the data transfer from the computer is stopped and

Supplement
press the [1] key (YES, CLEAR).
Following screen is displayed, the buffer memory is cleared, and it will • It will return to operation stop screen without
clearing buffer memory when [ESC] key
return to default screen.
(CANCEL) is pressed.

• In the case that the operation is interrupted

and the buffer is cleared, make sure that the
data transfer is stopped.
If the data transfer continues, abnormal
operations where data is processed from the
middle may occur.

3-13
Chapter 4: Convenient Functions
This chapter describes about the convenient functions of the plotter.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
4.1 Settings for Cutting
4.2 Copy (Duplicate Cutting)
4.3 Panel Cutting
4.4 Cross Cut Force
4.5 Dual Configuration

4-1
4.1 Settings for Cutting

Settings such as area and width of cutting, page length, mirrored, enlarged, shrunk, etc., can be set.

Setting cutting area

Origin point will be set at lower left of the AREA once the AREA is
set. It is possible to set the origin point at the center when the HP- Supplement
GL is selected. • See "Setting the Origin Point" about the
moving the origin point.
Move the origin point to change the cutting position.
• See "Setting Origin Point When HP-GL is
Set" for setting the origin point with HPGL
command.

It will only cut

within this range

Upper right set

position

Origin
point
Image already cut

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in READY status.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [3] key (AREA).

AREA PARAMETERS screen (1/2) is displayed.

4-2
3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.
AREA PARAMETERS screen (2/2) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (AREA).

SET LOWER LEFT screen is displayed. Supplement

• Coordinate value displayed here is the

distance to the tool carriage from the origin
point.

• Press [1] key (DEFAULT) if the cutting are is

not to change.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and move the tool

carriage to the position to be the lower left of the AREA.

6 Press the [ENTER] key (SET) once the tool carriage is in Supplement
correct position.
Please set the X and Y cut range for the areas
SET UPPER RIGHT screen is displayed. on the upper right and lower left points to at
least 10 mm.
An error message will appear for areas that are
too small.

7 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and move the tool

carriage to the upper right position of the AREA.
You will need to reset the settings for the upper
right and lower left points.

8 Press the [ENTER] key (SET) once the tool carriage is in

Supplement
correct position.
It will return to AREA PARAMETERS screen
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to AREA PARAMETERS
screen (2/2). (2/2) without changing the settings when you
press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

9 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

4-3
Setting cutting width (EXPAND)
Set the cutting width. It is possible to set that it will cut to the area outside of the push rollers, or not to cut at the
ends of the media.
Default setting is to the internal edge of the push rollers. It can be set up to 10 mm outside (positive value) or 10
mm inside (negative value) from the default position. The width will enlarge if the value is set to positive, and the
width will decrease if the value is set to negative. Setting will affect both ends, resulting the total width change
will be double the set value.

CAUTION

Do not set the "INITIAL BLADE ANGLE POSITION" of the tool setting to "Y OUTSIDE" when the setting value is set to more than 8
mm. The blade might be damaged by moving the carriage outside the media under this condition.

Supplement

• If the value is set to positive, it is able to cut over where the push rollers are, but the push rollers passes where it is cut, creating a
chance of bad feeding depending on the media

• Set the width of cutting area, and then send the cutting data to the plotter. Cutting data in the buffer memory will be cleared when
cutting area width is changed.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in READY status.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [3] key (AREA).

AREA PARAMETERS screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key

AREA PARAMETERS screen (2/2) is displayed.

4-4
 4 Press the [2] key (EXPAND).
SET EXPAND LIMIT screen is displayed.

Supplement

• If the settings value is set to an area between

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the +1.0 mm and +10.00 mm, transfer direction
setting value. of the cutting area will also expand 5 mm
forward.

• You can set the range between +10.0 and

-10.0 mm.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to AREA PARAMETERS Supplement
screen (2/2). It will return to AREA PARAMETERS setting
screen (2/2) without changing the settings when
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
you press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).
It will return to default screen.

Setting length of the page

Length of 1 page when using the roll media is set.
Only the part that will fit in to the set page length will be cut for the cutting data that is longer than the set page
length, and the exceeding part will not be cut.

Reference

• Default page length is 2 m. When doing long cuts, check the setting of the page length.
* Please be sure to use the basket (option) when cutting media over 2 m long.

• Page ejection quality assurance goes up to 15 m. (It depends on the media specified by Graphtec and setting conditions.)
• Use the basket (option).
• Use 3M Scotchcal Series 7725.
• Set the speed below 30 and the acceleration below 4 (In Simple mode, there is no need to set anything, so it is not available.)
• Perform pre feed for the amount to be used before cutting.
• Leave the media in environment to use for adequate time if the deviation of temperature and humidity is big.
• Set the both push rollers at least 15mm inside the edge of media.

• Set the sideway tension of the media uniform when setting the media when cutting long length. Media might come off the rollers
while cutting if it is not uniform.

• Pull out the amount to use before cutting when you are using the roll media.

• To reduce the shifting of the media, perform the pre feed to the full length to be cut (see "Pre Feed of Media (Paper or Marking
Film)". Also, pre feeding can be done automatically when the data is received (see "Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Cut Data is
Received", or done automatically when the media is loaded (see "Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Media is Set (Initial Feed)".
* Pre feeding will stabilize the feed by acclimating the media, taking out the slack.

• This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

4-5
Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the [3] key (PAGE LENGTH).

PAGE LENGTH screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the Supplement

setting value.
• Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting
digits.

• You can set the range between 20.0 and

5000.0 cm.

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA SETTING screen
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2)
(1/2).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

4-6
Setting mirror
There is a function to mirror the cutting by reversing the origin point and coordinate axes.
Set the MIRROR setting to ON to do mirroring.

Reference
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

MIRROR mode ON

MIRROR mode OFF

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [3] key (AREA).

AREA PARAMETERS screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the [3] key (MIRROR).

MIRROR screen is displayed.

4-7
 4 Press the [1] key (ON).
Supplement
To cancel the MIRROR, press the [2] key (OFF).

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to AREA PARAMETERS It will return to AREA PARAMETERS setting
screen (1/2). screen (1/2) without changing the settings when
you press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

The tool carriage moves to the coordinate position you set.
It will return to default screen.

Set the enlarge/shrink scale (Scale)

It can enlarge or shrink cutting.
The rate of enlargement or shrinkage of the cutting data can be changed by settings.

Reference
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [3] key (AREA).

AREA PARAMETERS screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the [1] key (SCALE).

SCALE screen is displayed.

4-8
4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the
Supplement
setting value.
Values that can be set are 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, and 8 (multiplications).

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to AREA PARAMETERS
It will return to AREA PARAMETERS screen (1/2)
screen (1/2).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

4-9
4.2 Copy (Duplicate Cutting)

The function to cut specified numbers of cutting data stored in the buffer memory is called COPY.

Supplement

• Do not send new data to plotter while copying. Cutting data in the buffer memory will be cleared.

• Previous cutting data will be cleared and newly sent data will be stored as cutting data if you send new data with 10 seconds or more
interval from the time it finished cutting.

• It can not copy if data is more than 1.6 MB because it cannot be stored in the buffer memory of the plotter.

• Buffer memory that can be used for copy will decrease if you turn on the data sort. Turn off the data sort when you need to copy
cutting with large data. See "Sorting the Cutting Data" for data sort.

• Watch out that it does not fall out of media when cutting with copy function.

• If the original cutting data to be copied starts away from the origin point, copied cutting will also start away from the origin point.
To avoid wasted space, create the cutting data close to the origin point.

• When copying using a roll paper barcode, be sure to can the barcode on the the leading edge.

When media change mode is OFF

Copy is performed in following order.

Second copy Fourth copy

Copy space

Copy
space

Origin point

First cut First copy Third copy

Copy origin point

It will copy in following order when MIRROR is set.

Copy origin point

First cut First copy Third copy

Origin point

Copy
space

Copy space

Second copy Fourth copy

4-10
It will copy in following order when ROTATE is set.

Copy origin point Second Third copy

First cut First copy copy Fourth copy

Origin point

Copy
space

Copy
space

Fifth copy Sixth copy

Operation
1 Plot (cut) the data you want to copy once.
Cutting data is stored in the buffer memory.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and move the tool

carriage to the position to copy.

3 Press the [COPY] key

Supplement
COPY MODE screen is displayed.
• When setting the copy interval, set "MEDIA
CHANGE MODE" to OFF.

• NO DATA FOR COPY IN BUFFER!" is

displayed if there is no data in the buffer
memory. Send the cutting data.

• If too much data is sent from the buffer

memory, "COPY MODE BUFFER FULL!!" will
be displayed.

• If the data to be copied is larger than the

cutting area, "CANNOT COPY CUT AREA
4 Press the [1] key (MEDIA CHANGE MODE). TOO SMALL!" will be displayed.
MEDIA CHANGE MODE screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (OFF).

Confirm the settings and it will return to the COPY MODE screen.

4-11
6 Press the [2] key (NUMBER OF COPIES).
NUMBER OF COPIES screen is displayed.

Supplement

7 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the • Number of copies can be set as much as it
can fit in the media set on the printer.
setting value.
• The initial value for the number of copies is
always 1.

8 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

Supplement
Number of copies will be selected, and it will return to COPY MODE
screen. "CANNOT COPY CUT AREA TOO SMALL!" is
displayed if the cutting area is smaller than the
copy data. Either expand the cutting area, or set
the media that is big enough to copy.

9 Press the [3] key (COPY MODE SETTINGS).

Supplement

•
COPY MODE SETTINGS screen is displayed.
COPY MODE SETTINGS can be set when
MEDIA CHANGE MODE is turned OFF.

• COPY SPACE can be set from 1.0 mm to

50.0 mm.

• CROSS CUT SPACING can be set when

CROSS CUT is turned ON.

10 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to increase or decrease the • This setting is maintained even if the power is
turned off.
current setting for [1] key (COPY SPACE X), [2] key (COPY
SPACE Y) and [4] key (CROSS CUT SPACING).
[3] key (CROSS CUT) can be set by pressing the [1] key (OFF)
or the [2] key (ON).

11 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
"COPY" is displayed on the screen, and it will copy as much as
specified. Cutting data is stored even if the media is
exchanged. It can be copied as many times until
the buffer memory is cleared. It can be copied
again after exchanging the media by pressing
[COPY] key.

4-12
When media change mode is ON
The Change Media message appears each time when ending a single cut in Media Change mode.
Choosing to change media will instantly detect the media and proceed to a copy area (cut).
Media switch copies can be made up to the set copy number (designated number).

Operation
1 Plot (cut) the data you want to copy once.
Cutting data is stored in the buffer memory.

Supplement
2 Press the [COPY] key.
• Turning MEDIA CHANGE MODE on will
display the CHANGE MEDIA message each
COPY MODE screen is displayed.
time after a single cut.

"If the [ESC] key (QUIT COPY) is pressed,

copying will be suspended and it will return to
the default screen.

• When exchanging media, the media selection

will be chosen from what was selected

3 Press the [1] key (MEDIA CHANGE MODE). before copying.

MEDIA CHANGE MODE screen is displayed.
• If there is no data in the buffer memory,
"NO DATA FOR COPY IN BUFFER!" will be
displayed. Please send cutting data.

• If too much data is sent from the buffer

memory, "COPY MODE BUFFER FULL!" will
be displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (ON). Supplement

Confirm the settings and it will return to the COPY MODE screen.
It will return to COPY MODE screen without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (PREVIOUS).

5 Press the [2] key (NUMBER OF COPIES).

NUMBER OF COPIES setting screen is displayed. Supplement
The copy number can be set from 1 to 100.

6 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

setting value.

4-13
7 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).
Supplement
NUMBER OF COPIES will be selected and it will return to COPY MODE
"CANNOT COPY CUT AREA TOO SMALL!" is
screen.
displayed if the cutting area is smaller than the
copy data. Either expand the cutting area, or set
the media that is big enough to copy.

8 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

The plotter starts a copy immediately.

9 Replace the media. (When the number of copies is "2" or

Supplement
more)
Cutting data is stored even if the media is
"COPY MODY CHANGE MEDIA!" will be displayed on the screen.
exchanged. It can be copied as many times
until the buffer memory is cleared. It can be
copied again after exchanging the media by
pressing [COPY] key.

10 The plotter starts a copy immediately after replacing the

media.

This operation's specified number of copies will be repeated.

To suspend, press the [ESC] key (QUIT COPY).

4-14
When Media Change Mode is OFF and Cross Cut is ON.
Using the plotting data stored in the buffer memory, repeat the plotting a specified number of times, perform cross
cut when moving to the media feed direction.

Supplement

• When using sheet paper, cross cut cannot be performed.

• When MIRROR or ROTATE is ON, the registration mark reading data cannot be copied.

• The copy interval at the CROSS CUT position is automatically set to 20 mm or more.

Copy is performed in following order.

Second copy Fourth copy

Copy space

Copy
space

Origin point

First
First cut copy Third copy
Copy origin point
Cross cut margin Cross cut margin
It is cross-cut at this position.

It will copy in following order when MIRROR is set.

Data that includes registration marks cannot be copied.

Copy origin point

First cut First copy Third copy

Origin point

Copy
space

Copy
space

Second copy Fourth copy

Cross cut margin

It is cross-cut at this position.

4-15
It will copy in following order when ROTATE is set.
Data that includes registration marks cannot be copied.

Third copy
Copy origin point Second
First cut First copy copy

Origin point

Cross cut
margin
Copy Copy
space space

Cross cut margin

It is cross-cut at this position.

Operation
1 Plot (cut) the data you want to copy once.
Cutting data is stored in the buffer memory.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and move the tool

carriage to the position to copy.

Supplement
3 Press the [COPY] key
COPY MODE screen is displayed.
• Turning MEDIA CHANGE MODE on will
display the CHANGE MEDIA message each
time after a single cut.

"If the [ESC] key (QUIT COPY) is pressed,

copying will be suspended and it will return to
the default screen.

• When exchanging media, the media selection

will be chosen from what was selected
before copying.

• If there is no data in the buffer memory,

"There is no data for copying in the buffer" will
be displayed. Please send cutting data.

• If too much data is sent from the buffer

memory, "1 copy in the Copy mode buffer!"
will be displayed.

4-16
4 Press the [1] key (MEDIA CHANGE MODE).
MEDIA CHANGE MODE screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (OFF).

Confirm the settings and it will return to the COPY MODE screen.

6 Press the [2] key (NUMBER OF COPIES).

NUMBER OF COPIES screen is displayed.

Supplement

7 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the • Number of copies can be set as much as it
setting value. can fit in the media set on the printer.

• The initial value for the number of copies is

always 1.

8 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

Supplement
Number of copies will be selected, and it will return to COPY MODE
screen. "CANNOT COPY CUT AREA TOO SMALL!" is
displayed if the cutting area is smaller than the
copy data. Either expand the cutting area, or set
the media that is big enough to copy.

9 Press the [3] key (COPY MODE SETTINGS). Supplement

COPY MODE SETTINGS screen is displayed.
• COPY MODE SETTINGS can be set when
MEDIA CHANGE MODE is turned OFF.

• COPY SPACE can be set from 1.0 mm to

50.0 mm.

• CROSS CUT SPACING can be set when

CROSS CUT is turned ON.

10 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to increase or decrease the • To use the CROSS CUT function, set the
copy interval in the feed direction to 20 mm or
current setting for [1] key (COPY SPACE X), [2] key (COPY
more.
SPACE Y) and [4] key (CROSS CUT SPACING).
[3] key (CROSS CUT) can be set by pressing the [1] key (OFF)
• This setting is maintained even if the power is
turned off.
or the [2] key (ON).

4-17
11 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
"COPY" is displayed on the screen, and it will copy as much as Cutting data is stored even if the media is
specified.
exchanged. It can be copied as many times until
the buffer memory is cleared. It can be copied
again after exchanging the media by pressing
[COPY] key.

4-18
4.3 Panel Cutting

To prevent skew of long media, utilize Panel Cutting when cutting.

Supplement

• When Panel Cutting is on, the machine will begin by dividing up partition length and continue cutting until one of the following data
breaks appears. When the first partitioned area cut is finished, the machine will move to the next area, and repeat this until all areas
have been cut.

• Data Breaks:
(1) No data sent for a few second after finishing cutting. (Time Out)
(2) A feed-related command is set. (GP-GL: F, FS commands, HP-GL: AF, AH, PG commands)
(3) HP-GL: SP0, NR, GP-GL: J0, SO.
(4) When commands from data breaks (2) and (3) appear, that command work will begin after the Panel Cutting is finished.

• Panel Cutting will continue for each piece of data when a data break is caused by a command, even if multiple pieces of data are
sent in before the cutting finishes (even when numerous pieces of Panel Cutting data are in the plotter buffer).

• When Panel Cutting and auto media transfer are both turned on, the machine will ignore automatic media transfer length settings
and continue working with priority of partition length plus something minutes ago (with footprints).

• When Panel Cutting is on, and registration marks will not be seen ignored, and copy, initial feed, and cutting area cannot be
changed.

• Panel Cutting cannot be done when one file of data makes the buffer full. Make sure to always send in data lower than the buffer
size.

Reference
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2) is displayed.

4-19
3 Press the POSITION ( ) key
MEDIA SETTING screen (2/2) is displayed.

4 Press the [3] key (PANEL CUTTING).

PANEL CUTTING screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (OFF).

PANEL CUTTING setting screen is displayed.

6 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to the PANEL CUTTING
screen.

7 Press the [2] key (DIVIDE LENGHT).

Supplement

•
DIVIDE LENGHT screen is displayed.
Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting
digits.

• The partition length can be set from 1.0 to

2000.0 cm.

8 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

setting value.

Supplement
9 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (2/2)
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to the MEDIA SETTING
without changing the settings when you press
screen (2/2).
the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

10 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

4-20
4.4 Cross Cut Force

Adjust the blade force when cross cutting.

The setting range of Cross Cut force is 1 to 48. The force becomes strong when the set value is large.
If the medium is thin, set the setting value to a small value, if it is thick, set it large.

Reference
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

MEDIA SETTING screen (2/2) is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (CROSS CUT FORCE).

CROSS CUT FORCE screen is displayed.

4-21
5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the
setting value.

Supplement
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2)
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA SETTING screen
(2/2). when you press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.
4.5 Dual Configuration

The plotter can store two types of setting independently. This is called
Supplement
dual configuration.
Operator can quickly switch between these settings by the dual When User is switched, the plotting data
disappears.
configuration function.
Two operators can save settings of each user's preference separately,
or two settings can be saved according to the media so that they can
quickly change the condition setting when changing media.
In Dual Configuration, operator has to select a user.

User Switching
Set the [USER 1/2] switching.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key twice.

ADVANCE screen (3/4) is displayed.

4-23
4 Press the [2] key (USER CHANGING 1-2)
USER CHANGING screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (Yes) or the [ESC] key (No).

6 When the [1] key (Yes) is pressed, the user setting will be
changed.
When the [ESC] key (No) is pressed, it will return to the
ADVANCE screen (3/4).

4-24
Chapter 5: ARMS
(Advanced Registration Mark Sensing System)
ARMS (Advanced Registration Mark Sensing System) is a function to scan the registration mark drawn on
the media using sensors.
Tilt of the axes and distance can be adjusted with 2POINTS or 3 POINTS. 2 axes warp adjustment can be
adjusted in addition to axes adjustment (tilt) and distance adjustment with 4POINTS.
When cutting the outlines of the printed figure, and when re-cutting media, using ARMS to adjust for printing
position discrepancies, high precision cutting can be done.
It is possible to perform a multiple registration mark adjustment or segment area adjustment by linking with
the application software on the computer. See the operation guides of the application software about the
registration mark adjustment function linked with the application software.
This chapter describes the outline of the ARMS (Advanced Registration Mark Sensing System) and how to
setup and use the ARMS on the control panel.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
5.1 Outline of ARMS
5.2 Setting and Adjustment of ARMS

5-1
5.1 Outline of ARMS

ARMS (Advanced Registration Mark Sensing System) will scan the registration mark (reference line) written on
the media using sensors.
Registration mark scanning accuracy when a designated registration mark is being scanned by this machine is
within 0.3 mm.
Please take note of the following when scanning a registration mark.

• Shape (Pattern) of the Registration Mark and Origin Point (Cutting Point)

• Scan Range Necessary to Detect the Registration Mark

• Positioning of the Media and the Registration Mark

• Cutting area when adjusting the registration mark

• Automatic detection of registration mark position

• Media That Registration Mark Cannot be Detected

5-2
Shape (Pattern) of the Registration Mark and Origin Point
The shapes (patterns) of the registration mark the plotter can scan are following 4 types.

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Origin point

Origin point

MARK TYPE 3 MARK TYPE 4

Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Origin point Origin point

Supplement

• Create the registration mark as a plotting data with the application software. Registration mark pattern 3 and 4 should be created
using Adobe Illustrator.

• Create the registration mark in accordance with following conditions.

• Thickness of the line is between 0.3 to 1.0 mm.
• Size of the registration mark is between 5 to 20 mm (see "Setting Registration Mark Size").
• Use pattern 1, pattern 2, pattern 3 or pattern 4 for the shape of the registration mark.
• Create the registration mark with single line, and specify the thickness of line to necessary thickness. Double line cannot be used.

• Apparel (AP) mode should be set to DISABLED.

• Panel Cutting should be switched to OFF.

5-3
Scan range necessary to detect the registration mark
The range of tool carriage and media movement needed to scan the registration mark is as following.
Do not print in the shaded area shown in the Figure below.
<For 3POINTS>

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

a
a
a
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

a
a
a

MARK TYPE 3 MARK TYPE 4

a a
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

a a

a=6mm

Registration mark scanning area

5-4
 <For 4POINTS>

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

a a
a a
a a

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

(There are central registration marks.) (There are central registration marks.)
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

a a a a

a a
a a a
a

MARK TYPE 3 MARK TYPE 4

Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

a a a a

a=6mm

Registration mark scanning area

Supplement

• Clean any dirt or foreign objects from the media. Any dirt or foreign object might be scanned mistakenly as registration mark.

• Plot the registration mark in contrast easy to scan, such as black lines on white background. Adjust the scanning level of the sensor
if you need to use the colored or glossy media. (See "Setting MARK SCAN Mode". )

5-5
Positioning of the media and the registration mark
Place the registration mark away from the edge of media to scan the registration mark.
Make sure the push roller location is outside of the registration mark.
Draw the registration mark as shown in the next image.
MARK TYPE 11 MARK TYPE 2 Unit: mm

35

37
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Leftmost push
roller Leftmost push
Rightmost push
roller Rightmost push
roller
roller
15*

17
15 15 15 15
Cutting area (same as the area after scanning the registration mark)
* When the expand limit is set to 1
or more, it will be 10.

Cutting area when adjusting the registration mark

Even when the registration marks are being adjusted, you can cut Supplement
the outside of the registration mark (cutting area).
If the distortion due to the adjustment is large,
there is a possibility that the cutting area is
reduced.

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Origin point
Origin point

MARK TYPE 3 MARK TYPE 4

Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Origin point Origin point

Media

Cutting area (same as the area after scanning the registration mark)

5-6
Automatic detection of registration mark position
The registration mark is detected within area A from the registration mark scanning start position (tool position).
When the registration mark is not detected within the area A, then within area B is detected. Only when the
registration mark is present in area A or B, it is possible to recognize as the mark.

Unit: approx. mm
Feed direction of media

Registration mark
reading start

100
position

100
100 100

Media that registration mark cannot be detected

It may be hard to scan the registration mark as following, depending on the media conditions.

• Transparent media

• Lines of registration marks are blurred

• Media that does not become an expected color due to the color of the background after printing

• Folded media

• Surface is dirty

• Laminated media (Depending on the type and condition of the laminate)

If you use media that does not have registration marks printed in black on white background, set the automatic
detection of registration mark position to OFF. (See "Setting registration mark automatic detection")
In addition, set the MARK SCAN Mode. (See "Setting MARK SCAN Mode".)

5-7
5.2 Setting and Adjustment of ARMS

This section describes the necessary adjustment and settings to correctly scan the registration mark with ARMS.

• Set the MARK SCAN Mode

• Checking the recommended setting of registration mark

• Check the lines of registration mark

• Test the registration mark sensor

• Adjust for the registration mark scan position

• Adjust after plotting the adjustment registration mark

• Detect the registration mark for adjustment on the media and enter the value

• Set the registration mark automatic detection

• Set speed of the registration mark scan

Set the MARK SCAN Mode

Select the SCAN Mode of the sensor to scan the registration marks. Select according to the media condition.
Mode 1: Select when using a general medium of white background.
Mode 2: Select when using colored media or glossy media.
Mode 3:Select when the plotter cannot scan in Mode 1 or Mode 2 with a special material.
Use the "RECOMMENDED SETTINGS" function to checkthe guideline for selecting a SCAN Mode.
In addition, set the registration mark adjustment value as necessary. Set the registration mark adjustment value
with "+" or "-".
For Mode 1, judgment is made based on the density of the registration mark. Please set "+" for dark registration
marks and "-" for pale registration marks.
For Mode 2 and Mode 3, judgment is made based on the contrast between the background and the register mark.
Set it to "+" when the contrast is large, and "-" when it is small.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [2] key (ARMS).

ARMS SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

5-8
3 Press the [1] key (SCAN MODE).
SCAN MODE screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (SCAN MODE).

SCAN MODE screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the mode. Supplement

It will return to ARMS SETTING screen without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (PREVIOUS).

Press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

6 Press the [2] key (ADJUST LEVEL). Supplement

ADJUST LEVEL screen is displayed.
The adjustment range of SCAN Mode 1 and 2 is
-50 to 100, and the adjustment range of SCAN
Mode 3 is -50 to 50.

7 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

setting value. Supplement
Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting
digits.

Press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

8 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ARMS SETTING screen It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (1/3)
(1/3).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).
9 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

5-9
Checking the recommended setting of registration mark
The media condition to be used is detected and then recommended conditions such as scan mode / registration
mark color / color of background of registration mark are displayed.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [2] key (ARMS).

ARMS SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (RECOMMENDED SETTING).

The following message is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tool to the

scanning start position (any position).
Feed direction of media

50mm Registration mark scanning start position

50mm

5 Confirm the position of the tool and press the [ENTER] key
(SET).

6 The tool carriage moves and automatically detects the media

condition. Supplement
The media condition is detected by moving 50 mm in the Y Do not move the tool carriage to the printed
direction and 50 mm in the X direction with respect to the area.
scanning start position.

5-10
7 The appropriate registration mark color is calculated from the
detected media condition and the color is displayed.

SCAN MODE: Recommended scanning mode 1/2/3 is

Supplement
displayed.
The display color of "MARK LINE COLOR" is Y:
ADJUST LEVEL: Recommended registration mark yellow, M: magenta, C: cyan, K: black, W: white,
adjustment value is displayed. R: red, G: green or B: blue.

MARK LINE COLOR: Recommended color is displayed.

BASE PAINT COLOR: Recommended color is displayed.

8 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (1/3).

9 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

5-11
Check the lines of registration mark
After detecting registration marks actually, confirm mark scanning operation.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [2] key (ARMS).

ARMS SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [3] key (MARK LINE CHECK). Supplement

MARK LINE CHECK screen is displayed.
This function is not available when MARK TYPE
3 or MARK TYPE 4 is used.

4 Press the [1] key (TYPE1) or the [2] key (TYPE2).

The following message is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tool to the

Supplement
scanning start position (red circle).
When checking the lines of registration mark
using the mask registration mark, set the mask
width to 20 mm on the application software.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
If it is 20 mm or less, the registration mark lines
cannot be checked properly.
Registration mark scanning start position
Feed direction of media

a a a

a a
a
Registration mark
a a
a=20mm

5-12
6 Confirm the position of tool and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

7 The scanning result is displayed on the screen.

Supplement
In the case of "not good", check the following.

• Check if the registration mark type is correct.

• Check if the SCAN Mode and adjustment

value are correct.

SCAN MODE : The currently set scanning mode is displayed. • Check the recommended value setting again.

RESULT: The scanning result (OK / NG) is displayed. • Make the registration mark line thicker.

• Check the above-mentioned "Media That

Registration Mark Cannot be Detected".
Even if the above is done, if it is "not good", the
registration mark cannot be used.

8 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (1/3).

9 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

5-13
Test the registration mark sensor
If there still is a difference in the cutting, even after performing an
CAUTION
adjustment using the registration mark, it is possible to check if there
is a problem with the registration mark itself or the application by This function performs cutting after the
evaluating the position of the registration mark plotted and detected registration mark is scanned. If a cutter is used

only using the plotter. as the tool, it may harm the plotter.

Operation
1 Print the standard registration mark in the supplied DVD.
Supplement

• Print the "Test Pattern 1" to test MARK TYPE

1, and "Test Pattern 2" to test MARK TYPE 2.

• Standard registration mark is inside the

"ARMS Test Files" folder of the supplied DVD.
Registration
File Format File Name
Mark Pattern
pdf ARMStest_type1.pdf
MARK TYPE 1
eps ARMStest_type1.eps
pdf ARMStest_type2.pdf
MARK TYPE 2
eps ARMStest_type2.eps

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

2 Load the printed media onto the plotter.

Supplement
See "Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)"
3 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. for loading the media.
MENU screen is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (ARMS).

ARMS SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ARMS SETTING screen (2/3) is displayed.

5-14
6 Press the [4] key (TEST ARMS SENSOR).
Supplement
TEST ARMS SENSOR screen is displayed.
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (2/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press either the [1] key (TYPE 1) or the [2] key (TYPE 2)
Supplement
depending on the type of the registration mark to be used.
It will return to TEST ARMS SENSOR screen
Following message is displayed.
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

8 Move the tool to the position to start scanning of the

registration mark by pressing the POSITION ( ) key.

Registration mark scan area

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Move the tool inside this Move the tool inside this
area area

9 Confirm the position of the tool and press the [ENTER] key.
Supplement
The plotter will automatically detect the registration mark and cut the
Following error is displayed when the
peak of each registration mark.
registration mark was not scanned properly.

10 Confirm the cutting result.

See "Adjusting for the Registration Mark Scan Position" and adjust if the
cutting position is shifted.

Press the [1] key (RETRY) to scan again, or the

[ESC] key (CANCEL) to exit.

5-15
Adjusting for the registration mark scan position
Sensor to scan the registration mark is positioned away from the tip of the tool (pen tip). Therefore, it is
necessary to adjust the coordinate values of the scanned registration mark so it will match with the cutting
position.
If the registration mark is already marked on the media, scan that registration mark, plot another registration
mark in the same position, and measure the difference between them. This difference is entered as a adjustment
value.
If there is no registration mark on the media, plot a registration mark first, scan that registration mark, plot
another registration mark, and measure the difference of them. This difference is entered as a adjustment value.
When using media and tools for actual use, the adjustment accuracy will be higher.

Reference
There is a restriction on the shape (style) of the registration marks that can be scanned. See "Shape (Pattern) of Registration Mark".

Adjust after plotting the adjustment registration mark

This section describes the steps to plot the registration mark.
Registration mark is to be plotted if there is no registration mark on the media to adjust the registration mark
scan position. Subsequently, it continues to "Adjusting the registration mark position".

Reference
Proceed to "Setting the Position Using ARMS" without plotting the registration mark if the registration mark is already drawn on the
media.

Operation
1 Load white media. Reference
See "Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)"
for loading white media.

2 Set the water-based fiber pen (black) on the tool holder

Reference
(Backward).
See "Attaching a Tool" for setting the water-
based fiber pen. If the water-based fiber-tip pen
has been scratched, then it may not scanned.

3 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

MENU screen is displayed.

5-16
4 Press the [2] key (ARMS).
ARMS SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ARMS SETTING screen (2/3) is displayed.

6 Press the [1] key (SENSOR OFFSET ADJ.). Reference

SENSOR OFFSET ADJ. screen is displayed.
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (2/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [1] key (TEST PATTERN).

Following message is displayed.

8 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and move the tool

carriage to the position to plot the registration mark (position
nothing is printed).

9 Press the [ENTER] key.

Reference
A adjustment registration mark is created, and then it will return to
SENSOR OFFSET ADJ. screen. It will return to SENSOR OFFSET ADJ. screen
without plotting by pressing the [ESC] key
(CANCEL).

5-17
10 Press [2] key (SCAN). The following message is displayed.
Following message is displayed.

11 Confirm that the tool is at the position shown in the left image
(grey square area), and press the [ENTER] key.
It will scan the registration mark, and then plot the registration mark for
comparison. It will return to SENSOR OFFSET ADJ. screen once the
plotting is completed.
Distance adjustment value Y
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Distance
adjustment
value X

Registration mark for

Align the tool to this area comparison Registration mark for
adjustment

12 Using the registration mark plotted in step 9, measure the

Supplement
distance of how much the adjustment registration mark
Position of the registration mark is measured at
needs to be moved so both will overlap, and record the
the center of the line.
value. As an example, in the figure above, it needs to move
in negative directions for both X and Y directions, so both of
the adjustment values will be negative values.

13 Press the [3] key (X).

SENSOR OFFSET ADJ. X screen is displayed.

14 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value. Set the X value measured in step 12.
You can set the range between -3.0mm and
+3.0mm.

15 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

SENSOR OFFSET ADJ.will be confirmed and it will return to SENSOR
OFFSET ADJ. screen.

5-18
16 Press the [4] key (Y).
SENSOR OFFSET ADJ. Y screen is displayed.

17 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between -3.0mm and
Set the Y value measured in step 12. +3.0mm.

18 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

SENSOR OFFSET will be conformed and it will return to SENSOR
OFFSET ADJ. screen.

19 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ARMS SETTING screen It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (2/3)
(2/3).
without changing the setting when you press the
[ESC] key (CANCEL).

20 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to the default screen.

5-19
Detect the registration mark for adjustment on the media and enter the value
Method to enter the adjustment value, which is the difference between the scanned registration mark on the
media and the cutting position, is described here.

Supplement
Plot the registration mark before going to following steps if there is no registration mark drawn on the media. See "Adjust After Plotting
the Adjustment Registration Mark" to plot registration marks.

Operation
1 Load the media with adjustment registration mark in the Supplement
plotter.
See "Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)"
for loading the media.

2 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

MENU screen is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (ARMS).

ARMS SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ARMS SETTING screen (2/3) is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (SENSOR OFFSET ADJ.).

Supplement
SENSOR OFFSET ADJ. screen is displayed.
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (3/4)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

5-20
6 Press the [2] key (SCAN).
Following message is displayed.

7 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and move the tool

carriage to the area to start scanning of the registration mark.

Registration mark scan area

Feed direction of media

Align the tool to this area

8 Confirm the position of the tool, and if it is OK, press the

Supplement
[ENTER] key.
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (3/4)
The registration mark for comparison is plotted after scanning the
without plotting when you press the [ESC] key
registration mark (see below). It will return to SENSOR OFFSET ADJ.
screen once the plotting is completed. (CANCEL).

Distance adjustment value Y

Feed direction of media

Distance
adjustment
value X

Registration mark
for comparison Registration mark for
adjustment

9 Using the scanned registration mark for adjusting, measure

Supplement
the distance of how much the comparison registration mark
Position of the registration mark is measured at
needs to be moved so both will overlap, and record the
the center of the line.
value. As an example, in the figure above, it needs to move
in negative directions for both X and Y directions, so both of
the adjustment values will be a negative values.

10 Press the [3] key (X).

SENSOR OFFSET ADJ. X screen is displayed.

5-21
11 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the
Supplement
setting value
You can set the range between -3.0mm and
Set the X value measured in step 9.
+3.0mm.

12 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

SENSOR OFFSET ADJ. is selected and it will return to SENSOR
OFFSET ADJ. screen.

13 Press the [4] key (Y).

SENSOR OFFSET ADJ. Y screen is displayed.

14 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the Supplement

setting value. You can set the range between -3.0mm and

Set the Y value measured in step 9. +3.0mm.

15 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

SENSOR OFFSET is selected and it will return to SENSOR OFFSET
ADJ. screen.

16 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ARMS SETTING screen
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (2/3)
(2/3).
without changing the setting when you press the

17 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. [ESC] key (CANCEL).

It will return to the default screen.

5-22
Setting the registration mark automatic detection
When setting the registration mark automatic detection to on, the following operations will be performed.
If the current position of the tool is close to the position of the first registration mark (Point 1) at the time of
registration mark automatic detection, the registration mark is automatically scanned without moving the detect
start position of tool.

Supplement
If the current position of the tool is distanced from the first registration mark, detection may take a long time, and errors due to not
finding anything may occur.

When setting to OFF, the operation above is not performed.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [2] key (ARMS).

ARMS SETTING setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ARMS SETTING screen (2/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (MARK AUTO SCAN).

MARK AUTO SCAN screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

5-23
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplemen
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ARMS SETTING screen
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (2/3)
(2/3).
without changing the settings when you press

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

It will return to the default screen.

5-24
Setting speed of the registration mark scan
Speed of the tool carriage and media to scan the registration mark is set.
It may not scan the registration marks or the difference may become large when the speed is too high, but the
cutting time becomes longer when the speed is too slow. Adjust the setting value considering the balance.
It is normally set to "NORMAL", but the scanning might improve when it is set to "SLOW" in cases where the
registration marks cannot be scanned or the difference is too big.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [2] key (ARMS).

ARMS SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ARMS SETTING screen (2/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [3] key (SENSING SPEED).

Supplement
SENSING SPEED screen is displayed.
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (2/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between 1 and 30 (cm/s).

5-25
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ARMS SETTING screen
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (2/3)
(2/3).
without changing the settings when you press

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

It will return to default screen.

5-26
Set cross cut between registration marks
When data is output in the media feed direction, set whether to cross-cut between registration marks.
Set cross cut when you want to cross-cut between registration marks in the media feed direction.

Supplement
Leave a gap of at least 20 mm between the registration marks.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [2] key (ARMS).

ARMS SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ARMS SETTING screen (3/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (ARMS CROSSCUT).

Supplement
ARMS CROSSCUT screen is displayed.
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (3/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

5 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

5-27
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ARMS SETTING screen
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen (3/3)
(3/3).
without changing the settings when you press

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

It will return to default screen.

5-28
Chapter 6: Manual Position Adjust
Here, we will explain how to match up points while manually confirming the media and tool (cutter pen or
plotting pen) points.
The ARMS function can be used for accurately matching up points.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
6.1 Outline of Manual Position Adjust
6.2 Manual Position Adjust

6-1
6.1 Outline of Manual Position Adjust

With manual position adjust, tilt of the axes are adjusted using the 2POINTS, 3POINTS, or 4POINTS adjustment
marks (grits or registration marks) as a standard. The distance between each point can also be entered to adjust
the distance.
Move the tip of each tool to the appropriate point.
Use magnifier or light pointer as a tool to match each points.
Use the media with prints (adjustment marks such as grits or registration marks) necessary to get XY axes and
origin point.

Setting mark scan mode and number of adjustment marks

To perform the AXIS ALIGNMENT, set the MARK SCAN MODE to "AXIS ALIGNMENT".
Select the number of the registration marks (adjustment marks) from 2POINTS, 3POINTS, or 4POINTS when the
MARK SCAN MODE is set to "AXIS ALIGNMENT". Position of each adjustment marks are as following.

Adjust with 2POINTS

2POINTS adjustment will scan 2 registration marks aligned in the media transportation direction, where the
adjustment is done measuring the tilting of the axis and the distance between the registration marks. This
adjustment is 1-axis adjustment (tilt adjustment).
If the loaded media is tilted as shown below, position of the scanned registration mark is shifted from the position
where it should be. Tilt and distance can be adjusted by comparing these coordinate values.
Original registration mark position

Tilt
Difference in X
Feed direction of media

Second registration mark

Difference in Y

First registration mark

6-2
Adjust with 3POINTS
3POINTS adjustment will scan 3 registration marks as shown below, where the adjustment is done measuring
the tilting of the X and Y axes and the distance between the registration marks (horizontal and vertical directions).
This adjustment is called 2-axis adjustment (tilt adjustment).
If the loaded media is tilted as shown below, position of the scanned registration mark is shifted from the position
where it should be. Tilt and distance can be adjusted by comparing these coordinate values.
Original registration mark position

Tilt
Difference in X
Feed direction of media

Second registration mark

Difference in Y

Difference in X

Original registration First registration mark

mark position Tilt
Difference in Y Third registration mark

Adjust with 4POINTS

4POINTS adjustment will scan 4 registration marks in the corners, where the adjustment is done measuring the
tilting of the X and Y axes and the distance between each of the registration marks. It will perform 2 axes warp
adjustment in addition to the 2 axes (tilt) adjustment and distance adjustment, so it can adjust more precisely
than other methods.

Print Cut

Data Image is printed tilted

and warped

GRAPHTEC 2AXES adjusted cut

General 1AXIS adjusted cut

6-3
6.2 Manual Position Adjust

Method of manual position adjust is described here.

Supplement

• Adjustment will be cleared if following is done after setting the adjustment.

• Set new origin point.
• Set the media again.
• Set rotation or mirror. (Set the rotation or mirror prior to the axis adjustment)
Axis adjustment will convert in accordance with rotation or mirror in this case.

• When the inclination of the axis is too large when setting the first and second point, the first and third point, the third and fourth point,
or the second and fourth point, "Angle adjustment error, please reset" will be displayed. After setting the media so as to make the
inclination small, please perform adjustment operations.

• Axis adjustment will be cleared when point 1 and point 2 is set to same point.

Operation
1 Load the media on which the registration mark patterns are
printed. Supplement
(See "Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)".) Confirm that the push roller is steadily on the
media within the range of media movement. This
adjustment is based on assumption that media
is slightly tilted. Media might fall off if the tilting
of the media is too large.

2 Set a cutter plunger or a pen in the tool holder.

3 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

MENU screen is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (ARMS).

ARMS SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

6-4
5 Press the POSITION ( ) key.
ARMS SETTING screen (3/3) is displayed.

6 Press the [2] key (MARK SCAN MODE).

MARK SCAN MODE screen is displayed.

7 Press the [1] key (MARK SCAN MODE).

MARK SCAN MODE setting screen is displayed.

8 Press the [2] key (AXIS ALIGNMENT).

Supplement
Axis Adjustment Mode will be activated and it will return to the MARK
It will return to ARMS SETTING screen without
SCAN MODE setting screen.
changing the setting when you press the [ESC]
key (PREVIOUS).

9 Press the [2] key (NUMBER OF POINTS).

NUMBER OF POINTS screen is displayed.

10 Press the [1] key (2POINTS), the [2] key (3POINTS), or the [3]
Supplement
key (4POINTS).
It will return to MARK SCAN MODE screen
The number of registration marks will be selected and it will return to
without changing the setting when you press the
MARK SCAN MODE screen.
[ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

11 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ARMS SETTING screen
(3/3).

6-5
12 Press the [3] key (DURING DETECTION).
Supplement
The following message is displayed.
If the MARK SCAN MODE screen does not
appear, press the [2] key (ARMS) in the MENU
screen.

13 Press the POSITION ( ) key to move it to the

Supplement
adjustment mark position.
Pressing the POSITION and [SLOW] keys at the
same time will move the tool carriage slower.

14 Confirm the position of the tool, and if it is OK, press the

Supplement
[ENTER] key (SET).
Once all the adjustment marks are specified, DISTANCE screen is • Repeat steps 13 to 14 when the message
prompting to move to the next registration
displayed.
mark is displayed.

• Number of times to repeat steps 13 to 14 differs

depending on the specified number of the
registration mark positions. Follow the message
that is displayed.

• It will return to default screen without scanning

the settings when you press the [ESC] key
(CANCEL).

Supplement
15 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to set the original distance on
• Measured distance is displayed in the top
the data. line in the DISTANCE input screen. Input
value (initially same as measured value) is
displayed under that.

• If the input value is not changed, it will

assume that there is no difference between
measured distance and the distance in the
data.

• Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting

digits.

6-6
16 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplement

•
The adjustments based on the registration mark scanning will be
It will return to default screen without changing
completed, and it will return to default screen.
the settings when you press the [ESC] key
(CANCEL).

• DISTANCE input screen for point 3 is displayed if

it is set to 3POINTS or more, so repeat steps 14 to
16 to set.

Supplement
Please refer to the following for adjustments when matching the manual position.

• 2 point matching, ["Point 1" settings] ["Point 2" settings] ["Origin point of the axis adjustment" settings] [Finish]

• 3 point matching, ["Point 1" settings] ["Point 2" settings] ["Point 3" settings] ["Distance between Point 1-2" settings] ["Distance
between Point 1-3" settings] ["Origin point of the axis adjustment" settings] [Finish]

• 4 point matching, ["Point 1" settings] ["Point 2" settings] ["Point 3" settings] ["Point 4" settings] ["Distance between point 1-2" settings]
["Distance between point 1-3" settings] [Finish]

6-7
Chapter 7:
Setting Regarding Cutting Quality
There are times that ideal cutting may not be possible, such as the lines may shift, corners deform, or uncut
sections occur, due to the characteristics of the media (thickness, how hard it is, etc.) or the shape of the
blades, when the actual cutting is done. Adjust the moving speed and force of the tool, and the control
method to prevent these problems.
This chapter describes the setting regarding the quality of the cutting.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
7.1 Cutting the Corner of Thick Media Sharp
7.2 Setting the Step Pass
7.3 Setting the Offset Angle
7.4 Setting the Distance Adjust
7.5 Setting Cut Line Pattern
7.6 Setting Initial Blade Control Position Adjust
7.7 Setting the OFFSET FORCE
7.8 Setting Adjustment Between the Tools
7.9 Cross cut the roll paper

7-1
7.1 Cutting the Corner of Thick Media Sharp

Outline of tangential mode

The blade needs to be facing toward the direction of cut when cutting the media. The tip of the blade is shaped
as shown so the blade is facing the cutting direction even when it is cutting curved lines or corners. The tip of the
blade is off from the rotation axis of the blade (CUTTER OFFSET). The blade will automatically turn and face the
cutting direction when the tool carriage moves, because the blade is forced to move from the rotation center, and
the blade tip gets resistance by the media.

Tool carriage

Blade
Resistance from
media Direction of movement

Media Toll rotation axis

Position of the
blade
Backing sheet
Cutter offset

The blade tip gets sunk into the media with 0.3 mm or thicker, making the blade hard to rotate. Especially for the
corners where two straight lines meet, cutting becomes very hard because it cannot rotate smoothly.
Tangential mode is a control method to precisely cut corners where two straight lines meet. (See below) With
the tangential mode, the blade is advanced so it will overcut at the corners before raising the tool. Then, it will be
lowered at the position slightly before the next line, and start to cut with slight overcut.
Tool down

Overcut (2) Tool movement

(1) Direction of the tool

Tool up

Overcut

Original cut line

(3) Direction of the tool

There are 2 modes for tangential mode.

Mode 1 : Overcuts the start and end points and acute-angle corners to eliminate uncut sections. In
addition, the cutter blade is moved on the surface of the medium during cutting when it is rotated
significantly, ensuring sharp cutting unaffected by the hardness or thickness of the media.
Mode 2 : Overcuts the start and end points only. In addition, the cutter blade is rotated on the medium
surface for the start cutting position only. Mode 2 uses simpler cutter control than Mode 1, and
provides a shorter cutting time.
The length of the overcuts by tangential mode can be set individually for start of the line and for end of the line.

7-2
Setting the tangential mode
Enabled (Mode 1 and Mode 2) and OFF of the tangential mode can be set individually for each of tool condition
No. 1 to 8.

Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

CONDITION setting screen (2/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [3] key (TANGENTIAL MODE).

TANGENTIAL MODE screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the tool condition

number (CONDITION No.).

5 Press the [1] key (MODE1), the [2] key (MODE2), or the [3]
key (OFF) to select the mode.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
It will return to CONDITION setting screen (2/3)
(2/3).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen.

7-3
Setting the length of overcut
Set the length of overcut with tangential mode.

Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

CONDITION setting screen (2/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [4] key (OVERCUT).

OVERCUT screen is display
Supplement
It is enabled when Tangential Mode is set.
When it is set to OFF, the screen below will be
displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (Condition No.)

CONDITION No. screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the CONDITION

No.

6 Confirm the setting, and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

Condition No. will be selected and it will return to OVERCUT screen.

7-4
7 Press the [2] key (START).
START screen is displayed.

8 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease

Supplement
the setting value.
You can set the range between 0.0 mm and 0.9
mm.

9 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

Length for overcut START is selected and return to OVERCUT setting
screen.

10 Press the [3] key (END).

Overcut length for END setting screen is displayed.

11 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease

Supplement
the setting value.
You can set the range between 0.0 mm and 0.9
mm.

12 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

Length for overcut END will be selected and it will return to OVERCUT
screen.

13 Repeat steps 3 to 12 as necessary to set multiple tool

CONDITION No.

14 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
(2/3). It will return to CONDITION setting screen (2/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

15 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen.

7-5
Setting of the Initial Down Force
The initial down-force setting is effective when tangential mode is selected.
Tangential mode is generally used for the cutting of thick media. With thick film, additional time is required for the
cutter blade to penetrate the media fully, even when the necessary cutting force is applied.
The cutting operation starts before the cutter blade has fully penetrated the media, causing uncut sections to be
left.
When the initial down force is specified, this force is used as the cutting force immediately after the lowering of the
tool when tangential mode is selected, enabling the cutter blade to penetrate the media rapidly. (As an example,
if the cutting force is 25 and the initial down force is 4, for example, the cutting force applied immediately after the
pen is lowered will be 29.) The upper limit for added value is 48.

Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

CONDITION setting screen (3/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (INITIAL DOWN FORCE).

INITIAL DOWN FORCE screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the CONDITION

No.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease

Supplement
the setting value.
You can set the range between 0 and 20.

7-6
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
It will return to CONDITION setting screen (3/3)
(3/3).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen.

7-7
7.2 Setting the Step Pass

It may not cut the curved line smoothly if there is very short lines in the curve.
It will cut in the units of the specified value when the STEP PASS is used, which allows to control the short lines
with certain length, resulting to stable rotation of the blade for higher cut quality.
Setting range of STEP PASS is from 0 to 20.
Actual length of the STEP PASS is the value of the STEP PASS multiplied by the distance set in the "STEP SIZE".

Supplement

• This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

• The cut image may not be what you intended if the set value is too large. It is recommended to set to "1" for normal use.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the [3] key (STEP PASS).

STEP PASS screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease

Supplement
the setting value.
You can set the range between 0 and 20.

7-8
5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOLS SETTING screen
It will return to TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4)
(1/4).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

7-9
7.3 Setting the Offset Angle

The FC9000 analyzes the cutting data, and controls the angle of the cutter blade tip if the change in the angles of
the corner is large.
Angle control is applied if there is larger angle change than the angle specified as reference angle.
The time to cut is shortened by setting large value for the reference angle, since it will only apply blade control
when there are angles with large angle change, hence reducing the time to make the blade control.
But, if it is set too large, there will be not enough angle control of the blade, and the cut result may differ from what
was expected. Set the reference angle in good balance.

Supplement
The setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

TOOLS SETTING screen (2/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (OFFSET ANGLE).

OFFSET ANGLE screen is displayed.

7-10
5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease
Supplement
the setting value.
You can set the range between 0 and 60.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOLS SETTING screen
(1/4). It will return to TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

7-11
7.4 Setting the Distance Adjust

DISTANCE ADJUST value corrects any deviation in the length of cut or plotted line segments, which occurs
depending on the media being used. DISTANCE ADJUST value for the deviation is specified as a percentage of
the total distance. For example, a setting of +0.05% adjusts a distance of 2 m (2,000 mm) by 2,000 x 0.05% = 1
mm, making 2,001 mm. DISTANCE ADJUST can be specified for each CONDITION No.

Supplement
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

CONDITION setting screen (3/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [1] key (DISTANCE ADJUST).

D. ADJ. screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the CONDITION

No.

7-12
5 Press the [1] key (ON).
DISTANCE ADJUST becomes ON and [3] key (X) and [4] key (Y)
becomes enabled.

6 Press the [3] key (X).

X DISTANCE ADJUST screen is displayed.

7 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease

Supplement
the setting value.
• You can set the range between -2.00% and
+2.00%.

• Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting

digits.

8 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

X DISTANCE ADJUST will be confirmed and it will return to D. ADJ.
screen

9 Press the [4] key (Y).

Y DISTANCE ADJUST screen is displayed.

10 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease

Supplement
the setting value.
• You can set the range between -2.00% and
+2.00%.

• Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting

digits.

11 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

Y DISTANCE ADJUST will be confirmed and it will return to D. ADJ.
screen.

7-13
12 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
It will return to CONDITION setting screen (3/3)
(3/3).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

13 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

7-14
7.5 Setting Cut Line Pattern

Lines can be cut with perforated lines so the cut parts will not fall off. There are 8 different patterns of perforated
lines set as 0 to 7, and the ratio of cut and uncut part differs in each (tool is raised or the force is decreased for
following length every 8 mm of the cut). The uncut part becomes shorter with smaller value, making it easier to
separate the cut parts.
• Pattern 0: 0.15 mm • Pattern 1: 0.20 mm • Pattern 2: 0.25 mm • Pattern 3: 0.30 mm
• Pattern 4: 0.35 mm • Pattern 5: 0.40 mm • Pattern 6: 0.45 mm • Pattern 7: 0.50 mm
In addition to above 8 patterns, "OFF" which cuts by the solid line without perforation patter and "USER" where
user can specify a unique pattern are provided.
The processing in the part is not cut with perforation patter is adjusted in "UP MODE".
The perforation patter can be set for each condition number.

Supplement

• Normally use it with default value OFF. It will cut with solid line.

• Use Tool Holder (forward) when cutting with any perforation pattern (aside from turning it off).

Bracket to hold Tool holder

tool Flange

Tool holder
(Backward: Half cutting/Plotting Pen)

Tool holder
(Forward: Using cutting)
Seen from above

• Doing a cut-out (cutting out) with a perforated pattern instead of a normal film cut (half cutting) can damage the cutting mat and the
quality of a normal cut. Please make sure to use Tool Holder (backward).

• Replacing a cutting mat that was damaged by doing a perforated cut with use of Tool Holder (backward) will require a service fee.

• When the tool number is switched between the Tool No. 1 and the Tool No. 3 using the command from the computer, the following
message will appear.

Please follow the message's instructions.

• The cut on the perforation pattern is shortened by 5 mm on the +X side (back of the media).

7-15
Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

Supplement
CONDITION setting screen (3/3) is displayed.
It will return to default screen without changing
the settings when you press the [CONDITION]
key.

3 Press the [3] key (CUT LINE PATTERN).

CUT LINE PATTERN screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (Condition No.).

CONDITION No. screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) key and select the CONDITION

No.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

CONDITION No. will be selected and it will return to CUT LINE
PATTERN screen.

7-16
7 Press the [2] key (TYPE No.).
TYPE No. screen is displayed.

8 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the TYPE No.

9 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS). Supplement
TYPE No. will be selected and it will return to CUT LINE PATTERN
screen. • CUT L and UP L is displayed when the TYPE
No. 0-7 is selected. Also, you will be able to
set the UP MODE.

• Setting for all becomes enabled when USER

is selected.

• Nothing will be displayed when "OFF" is

selected.

10 Press the POSITION ( ) key (UP MODE).

Supplement
UP MODE screen is displayed.
You can set the range between 1 and 48, and
"UP".

11 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and set the UP MODE.

Supplement

• Value set here will be the cut force for the

uncut part of the perforated lines. Tool will be
raised when set to "UP".

• Normally, input the smaller value than the

FORCE for cutting to make it half cutting.
12 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).
It will return to UP MODE screen.

7-17
13 If the "USER" is chosen in step 8, press the [3] key (CUT
Supplement
L.) and the [4] key (UP L.) to set the cut length and tool up
length. • If the TYPE No. 0 to 7 is selected in step
8, CUT L and UP L is only displayed, and
Follow steps 10 to 12 for this operation. not possible to change. Skip this step, and
proceed.

• Range possible to set for the CUT L is 0.1 mm

to 100.0 mm.

• Range possible to set for the UP L is 0.1 mm

to 10.0 mm.

• Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting

digits.

• If the CUT LENGTH is too long or the UP

LENGTH is too short, the media may get
caught.
In that case, adjust BLADE LENGTH, CUT
LENGTH and UP LENGTH.

14 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET) in the
Supplement
CUT LINE PATTERN screen.
It will return to CONDITION setting screen (3/3)
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
without changing the settings when you press the
(2/3).
[ESC] key (CANCEL).

15 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to the default screen.

7-18
7.6 Setting Initial Blade Control Position Adjust

After turning on the power or changing pen condition settings, touch the blade to the media and adjust the blade
direction. The Initial Blade Control Position will need to be set in order to make sure the area is not damaged and
that the blade properly makes contact with the media.
Selecting "2mm BELOW" will change the Initial Blade Control Position to 2 mm below the cutting start point (2 mm
from the edge of the point from which the media will be shifted.)
Selecting "Y OUTSIDE" will initialize Initial Blade Direction Setting outside the cutting area.
Selecting "SPECIFIED Y POSITION" will initialize Initial Blade Direction Setting at the Y direction fixed position
that has been set.
* When media narrower than the set Y position is set, it will be the Y maximum value.

Cutting area
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

2mm

Push roller
Cut Start Point (Cutting Origin
Point)
Initial Blade Control Position
Initial Blade Control Position Setting Point (Set as
Setting Point (Set as "2mm "OUTSIDE")
BELOW")

CAUTION

Selecting [Y OUTSIDE] and then changing the expand setting to a positive digit (8 mm ABOVE) can damage the cutting mat.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4) is displayed.

7-19
3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.
TOOLS SETTING screen (4/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (INITIAL B. ANGLE POSITION).

INITIAL BLADE ANGLE POSITION setting screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (2 mm BELOW), the [2] key (Y OUTSIDE) or

Supplement
the [3] key (SPECIFIED Y POSITION).
When the [3] key (SPECIFIED Y POSITION) is
selected, the following message is displayed.

Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the

tool position and then press the [ENTER] key to
make the setting.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOLS SETTING screen
It will return to TOOLS SETTING screen (4/4)
(4/4).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

7-20
7.7 Setting the OFFSET FORCE

Slight cut operation is performed before the actual cut operation to align the blade toward the cutting direction.
Lower FORCE is necessary compared with the normal cutting, so it is possible to set lower FORCE as an
OFFSET FORCE.
OFFSET FORCE is used to control the rotation of the blade with the tangential mode in addition to control the
blade direction at the beginning of the cut.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the [4] key (OFFSET FORCE).

OFFSET FORCE screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to select the Condition No.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease

Supplement
the setting value.
You can set the range between 1 and 40.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOLS SETTING screen
(1/4). It will return to TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4)
without changing the settings when you press
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

It will return to default screen.

7-21
7.8 Setting Adjustment Between the Tools

If there is a misalignment between the tools, you can correct the misalignment by using this function.

In the case of Tool 1 - Tool 3

If there is a misalignment in the cutting/plotting between Tool 1 (tool attached to the backward of the tool holder)
and Tool 3 (tool attached to the forward of the tool holder), you can correct it by entering the adjustment value.

Supplement
Set "TOOL NO. SETTING" of tool condition 1 to 1 and set "TOOL" to Pen.
Set "TOOL NO. SETTING" of tool condition 2 to 3 and set "TOOL" to Cutter.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOL SETTING (1/4) screen is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (TOOL OFFSET ADJ.).

Supplement
TOOL OFFSET ADJ. screen is displayed.
When the optional 2-pen type is used, the
following is displayed.

You can switch between "Tool 1-3" and "Tool

4 Press the [2] key (TEST PATTERN).
1-2" by pressing the [1] key.
The following message is displayed.

7-22
5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tool carriage
Supplement
to the position where the test pattern is plotted.
Move it inside of a cutting area greater than 50 mm on both • It will return to TOOL OFFSET ADJ. screen
without changing the settings when you press
the X and Y axes.
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

• Pressing the POSITION and [SLOW] keys at

the same time moves the tool carriage slowly.

6 Confirm the tool position and press the [ENTER] key.

Using the pen plunger (Tool 1), plot a "+" mark.

Next, using the pen plunger (Tool 3), plot a "+" mark.

When plotting is completed, TOOL OFFSET ADJ. screen is displayed.

7 Using "+" plotted with the pen plunger (Tool 1) as a reference,

measure how much the "+" cut by the cutter plunger (Tool 3)
deviates. (For example, in the case shown in the figure, it is
deviated in the -X direction / + Y direction, so enter X = + *
mm, Y = - * mm.)

"+" plotted with

the cutter plunger
(Tool 3)

Y mm

"+" plotted with

the cutter plunger
X mm (Tool 1)

8 Press the [3] key (X=+0.0mm).

Tool 1-3 Interval Adjustment (X) screen is displayed.

7-23
9 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the
Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between -3.0 mm and
+3.0 mm.

10 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

Tool Interval Adjustment screen is displayed.

11 Press the [4] key (Y=+0.0mm).

Tool 1-3 Interval Adjustment (Y) screen is displayed.

12 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between -3.0 mm and
+3.0 mm.

13 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

TOOL OFFSET ADJ. screen is displayed.

14 Repeat steps 4 to 13 until the misalignment between the two

tools is corrected.

15 Confirm the interval and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOL SETTING (1/4) It will return to TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4)
screen.
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

16 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

7-24
Between tools 1 and 2
(Option 2-pen type only)
If there is a misalignment in the cutting/plotting between Tool 1 (tool attached to the backward of the tool holder)
and Tool 3 (tool attached to the forward of the tool holder), you can correct it by entering the adjustment value.

Supplement
Set "TOOL NO. SETTING" of tool condition 1 to 1 and set "TOOL" to Cutter.
Set "TOOL NO. SETTING" of tool condition 2 to 2 and set "TOOL" to Pen.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOL SETTING (1/4) screen is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (TOOL OFFSET ADJ.).

TOOL OFFSET ADJ. screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (TOOL 1-3).

TOOL OFFSET ADJ. screen is displayed.

7-25
5 Press the [1] key (TOOL 1-2).
TOOL OFFSET ADJ. screen is displayed.

6 Press the [2] key (TEST PATTERN).

The following message is displayed.

7 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tool carriage

Supplement
to the position where the test pattern is plotted.
Move it inside of a cutting area greater than 50 mm on both • It will return to TOOL OFFSET ADJ. screen
without changing the settings when you press
the X and Y axes. the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

• Pressing the POSITION and [SLOW] keys

at the same time will move the tool carriage
slower.

8 Confirm the tool position and press the [ENTER] key.

Using the cutter plunger (Tool 1), plot a "+" mark.

Next, using the pen plunger (Tool 2), plot a "+" mark.

When plotting is completed, Tool Interval Adjustment screen is

displayed.

7-26
9 Using "+" plotted with the cutter plunger (Tool 1) as a
reference, measure how much the "+" cut by the pen plunger
(Tool 2) deviates. (For example, in the case shown in the
figure, it is deviated in the -X direction / + Y direction, so enter
X = + * mm, Y = - * mm.)

"+" plotted with the

pen plunger (Tool
2)

Y mm

"+" plotted with

the cutter plunger
X mm (Tool 1)

10 Press the [3] key (X=+0.0mm).

Tool 1-2 Interval Adjustment (X) screen is displayed.

11 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between -3.0 mm and
+3.0 mm.

12 Confirm the setting and press [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

TOOL OFFSET ADJ. screen is displayed.

13 Press the [4] key (Y=+0.0mm).

Tool 1-3 Interval Adjustment screen is displayed.

14 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between -3.0 mm and
+3.0 mm.

7-27
15 Confirm the setting and press [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).
TOOL OFFSET ADJ. screen is displayed.

16 Repeat steps 4 to 13 until the misalignment between the two

tools is corrected.

17 Confirm the interval and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOL SETTING (1/4)
It will return to TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4)
screen.
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

18 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

7-28
7.9 Cross cut the roll paper

The operation to separate media is called "Cross Cut".

You can manually cross-cut at any position or cross-cut automatically at the end of cutting.
The blade force to cross-cut is called Cross Cut force and can be adjusted.

CAUTION

Do not place your hands where the blades pass. There is a danger of injury.

Supplement

• Cross Cut is available only when using roll media. Sheet media cannot be cross-cut.

• Clean the cutting groove regularly with a cotton bud or the like. If the dust or the like accumulates, the cutter cannot operate properly.

• If cross-cut media is placed on the media sensor, remove the cross-cut media. If it is not removed, it is judged as a cut failure and
Cross Cut operation is performed again.

• Set "Push roller sensor setting" and "Media sensor setting" to Enabled. If it is set to Disabled, Cross Cut operation is not available.

7-29
Cut Width
The movement range of the blade in Cross Cut operation is from the outer edge of the leftmost grit roller to the
outer edge of the rightmost grit roller. The media should be set within this range.

Grit roller
Supplement
Replace the cross cut unit as per the following
guidelines.

• Paper back film: 1000 mm wide paper

Approx. 3000 sheets (Model: PM-CC-002)

• Plastic back film: 1000 mm wide paper sheets

Approx. 3000 sheets (Model: PM-CC-002)

Manually cross-cut
Cross-cut at the current tool carriage position.
If you manually cross-cut after moving the media with the POSITION ( ) keys, you can separate the roll paper at
any position.

Operation
1 Press the [CROSS CUT] key in the default screen.
CROSS CUT screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (CUT).

Supplement
Cross-cut the media.
It will return to default screen without performing
the Cross Cut when you press the [ESC] key
(CANCEL).

7-30
Automatically cross-cut
When plotting with the supplied software, you can cross-cut automatically after plotting is completed. For details,
see the manual of the supplied software.
When Apparel (AP) mode setting is set to Enabled, Cross Cut is performed with timeout and separator command
without receiving cross cut command. The position to cross-cut is the position separated from the plotted range by
"SPACE REAR".
For "Margin behind" and "Apparel (AP) mode" see "Apparel (AP) mode".

7-31
Chapter 8:
Settings Regarding Cutting Time
Time necessary for cutting depends on the speed to move the tool and media, and efficiency of the
operation.
It is best to cut slowly and carefully to cut precisely, but the speed is required to enhance the operational
efficiency. The setting needs to be in good balance considering the characteristics of the media and tools,
and the contents of the cutting data.
This chapter describes the settings affecting the cutting time.
In addition to this chapter, there are settings affecting the cutting times in following places.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
8.1 Sorting the Cutting Data
8.2 Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Cut Data is
Received
8.3 Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Media is Set
(Initial Feed)
8.4 Setting Feed Speed for Pre Feed
8.5 Setting the MOVING SPEED
8.6 Setting the Tool Up Move
8.7 Setting the Tool Up Height

8-1
8.1 Sorting the Cutting Data

When sorting cutting data, cutting is performed collectively so that the amount of movement in the media feed
direction and the tool replacement time are minimized, so cutting operation is improved efficiently.
There are two types of sorting, area sort and tool sort.
Area sort : The cutting data is sorted so that the amount of movement in the media feed direction is
minimized. It is much more efficient than cutting at intervals with data that forces tools to jump
from point to point.
Tool sort : In order to minimize the time it takes to change the tool, the ones with the same tool
conditions are plotted together.

Supplement

• Sorting will start the process after all the data are stored in the buffer memory, so it takes time to start the cutting.

• Sorting might not be effective for the data that is created efficiently.

• Process may be faster to turn off the sorting on the plotter, if the data is already sorted using the software on the PC.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

TOOLS SETTING screen (2/4) is displayed.

8-2
4 Press the [2] key (DATA SORTING).
DATA SORTING screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (AREA).

AREA screen is displayed.

6 Press the [1] key (OFF) or the [2] key (ON).

7 Press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

DATA SORTING screen is displayed.

8 Press the [2] key (TOOL).

TOOL screen is displayed.

9 Press the [1] key (OFF) or the [2] key (ON).

10 Press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

DATA SORTING screen is displayed.

11 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOLS SETTING screen
It will return to TOOLS SETTING screen (2/4)
(2/4).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

12 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

Supplement
It will return to default screen.
mark is displayed at the right of the screen
when SORT MODE is set. See "How to Use
Control Panel".

8-3
8.2 Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Cut Data
is Received

It is possible to feed and reverse the media automatically for specified amount when the plotter receives the
cutting data.
"Pre feeding" to prevent the shifting of media can be done automatically. Also, the media will be unrolled from the
roll before cutting when rolled media is to be used.

• "Pre Feed of Media (Paper or Marking Film)"

• "Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Media is Set (Initial Feed)"

Supplement

• The setting for AUTO PRE FEED when cutting data is received is maintained even if the power is turned off.

• Setting of the AUTO PRE FEED length is not linked to the setting of the page length. Change the setting for the page length if the
cutting area is to be long.

• If data is received and auto media transfer is performed once, even if (cut in the same area) data is received again, auto media
transfer will not take place.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (AUTO PRE FEED).

AUTO PRE FEED screen is displayed.

8-4
4 Press the [1] key (OFF).
AUTO PRE FEED setting screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

Supplement
AUTO PRE FEED will be selected and it will return to AUTO PRE FEED
screen. It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

6 Press the [2] key (FEED LENGTH).

FEED LENGTH screen is displayed.

7 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease

Supplement
the setting value.
• Feed length can be set in 0.1 m units.

• You can set the range between 0.5 m and

50.0 m.

• Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting

digits.

8 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

FEED LENGTH is selected and return to AUTO PRE FEED screen.

9 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key. Supplement

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA SETTING screen
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2)
(1/2).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

10 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

Supplement
It will return to default screen.
mark is displayed at the right of the screen
when AUTO PRE FEED is set. See "How to Use
Control Panel".

8-5
8.3 Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Media is
Set (Initial Feed)

It can be set to automatically feed and return the length of the page when the media is loaded and the media set
lever is raised.
This is equal to automatically perform the "Pre Feed" to prevent the shifting of the media.

• "Pre Feed of Media (Paper or Marking Film)"

• "Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Cut Data is Received"

• "Setting Feed Speed for Media Set"

Supplement
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the [4] key (INITIAL FEED).

INITIAL FEED screen is displayed.

4 Set the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA SETTING screen
(1/2). It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2)
without changing the settings when you press
6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

It will return to default screen.

8-6
8.4 Setting Feed Speed for Pre Feed

Set the speed of media transfer during the feed (media carry) of auto media transfer of received cut data, leveling
of the initial feed etc.
Set the feed speed to "SLOW" if the media shifts during the pre feed if the media is heavy or slippery. It is normally
set to "NORMAL".

• "Pre Feed of Media (Paper or Marking Film)"

• "Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Media is Set (Initial Feed)"

• "Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Cut Data is Received"

Supplement
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

MEDIA SETTING screen (2/2) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (FEED SPEED).

FEED SPEED screen is displayed.

8-7
5 Press the [1] key (SLOW) or the [2] key (NORMAL).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA setting screen (2/2).
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (2/2)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

8-8
8.5 Setting the MOVING SPEED

MOVING SPEED is the speed the tool moves when it is raised (tool up state).
The cutting time in total becomes short if you set the MOVING SPEED to fast speed even though the speed of the
tool when it is cutting (lowered) is set to slow speed for the hard to cut media (hard or sticky).

Supplement
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key twice.

TOOLS SETTING screen (3/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (MOVING SPEED).

MOVING SPEED screen is displayed.

8-9
5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease
Supplement
the setting value.
• You can set to AUTO, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 or 60
cm/s.

• It will be same speed as tool is lowered when

AUTO is selected.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOLS SETTING screen
It will return to TOOLS SETTING screen (3/4)
(3/4).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

8-10
8.6 Setting the Tool Up Move

Tool up movement is when you continuously receive tool up movement coordinate news from the computer
connected to the FC9000 and set whether to move to every coordinate in order or go directly to the last one.
There are following 2 settings for TOOL UP MOVE.
ENABLED : If several coordinates are received continuously, it will move to each in order it is received.
DISABLED : If several coordinates are received continuously, it will directly move to the last coordinate received.
Cutting time can be reduced if it is set to "DISABLED", if the time to move the tool in raised status is wasteful.

Supplement
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key twice.

TOOLS SETTING screen (3/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (TOOL UP MOVE).

TOOL UP MOVE setting screen is displayed.

8-11
5 Press the [1] key (ENABLED) or the [2] key (DISABLED).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOLS SETTING screen
(3/4). It will return to TOOLS SETTING screen (3/4)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

8-12
8.7 Setting the Tool Up Height

The TOOL UP HEIGHT is the height of the tool position when the tool is raised.
Set to "HIGHER POSITION" if the media is thick. Usually, set to the "NORMAL POSITION".

Supplement
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key twice.

TOOLS SETTING screen (3/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [3] key (TOOL UP HIGHT).

TOOL UP HIGHT screen is displayed.

8-13
5 Press the [1] key (NORMAL POSITION) or the [2] key
(HIGHER POSITION).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOLS SETTING screen
It will return to TOOLS SETTING screen (3/4)
(3/4).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

8-14
Chapter 9:
Setting Regarding Interface
This chapter describes setting regarding interface.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
9.1 Setting Interface
9.2 Clearing the Buffer Memory
9.3 I/F (LAN)
9.4 Connecting with RS-232C

9-1
9.1 Setting Interface

This section describes how to set the interface.

The plotter has USB, network (LAN) and RS-232C* interfaces, and these interfaces are switched automatically.
To use one of the interfaces on this plotter, you need to install the driver software on the PC.
* RS-232C interface depends on the sales area. For details, please contact the distributor where you purchased.

USB interface
To use the USB interface, the driver software must be installed in the computer. Please the SETUP MANUAL to
install the driver software.
For the plotter side, please perform command settings, step size settings (when using GP-GL commands), and
origin point settings for HP-GL (when using HP-GL commands).

CAUTION

Operation cannot be guaranteed in the following cases:

• When the plotter is connected to a USB hub or extension port.

• When the plotter is connected to a hand-built or modified computer.

• When a driver other than the one provided as a standard accessory is used.

Notes when using the USB 3.0 interface

• Because that some computer equipped with a USB 3.0 interface is not compatible with USB 2.0 or later interface, you need to check
it.

Do not perform the followings:

• Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable while installing the USB driver on the computer.

• Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable when the computer or the plotter is performing an initialization routine. Do not
disconnect the USB cable within a 5-second period of connecting it.

• Do not disconnect the cable during data transfer.

• Do not connect multiple plotters to a single computer using the USB interface.

Network (LAN) interface

To use the network (LAN) interface, the settings of the computer and the device such as a network hub have been
completed and the environment that can connect the computer to the network must be established.

CAUTION

• To connect through a LAN, you need a network (LAN) cable and a network hub. Please purchase them separately.

• Configuration of network equipment and the presence or absence of the router function depends on your environment. For details,
please see the equipment manual, or consult the manufacturer or network administrator.

• Ethernet is compliant with 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. Please check your network environment.

9-2
RS-232C interface
When using the RS-232C interface*, set the command settings, step size settings (when using GP-GL
commands), origin point settings for HP-GL (when using HP-GL commands), and transfer conditions for the RS-
232C interface. The transfer conditions for the RS-232C interface can be set from the operations panel. The
transfer condition should be set to the same in the software used and in the FC9000. If there is a mistake in the
settings an error may displayed in the plotter and lack of data can cause a malfunction. In such a case, please
confirm the data transfer settings again.
* RS-232C interface depends on the sales area. For details, please contact the distributor where you purchased.

(See "Setting Origin Point When HPGL is Set")

(See “Setting the STEP SIZE”)
(See "Setting the Command (COMMAND)")
(See "Connecting with RS-232C")

9-3
9.2 Clearing the Buffer Memory

This function allows you to clear all the output data in the plotter's buffer memory.

CAUTION

Do not execute the BUFFER CLEAR function until the operation of the plotter is stopped.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [1] key (BUFFER CLEAR).

BUFFER CLEAR screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (YES, CLEAR). Supplement

Buffer will be cleared and it will return to default screen.
It will return to INTERFACE screen (1/3) without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).

9-4
9.3 I/F (LAN)

Set the network interface (LAN).

Supplement
When you change the settings of the network, the plotter is reset.

To connect through a network (LAN), it is necessary to set the following items.

• Set the DHCP

• Set the IP address

• Set the subnet mask

• Set the gateway

• Display the MAC address

Setting the DHCP

DHCP settings depend on the configuration of network equipment and the customer’s environment. For details,
please see the equipment manual, or consult the network administrator.
The default setting of DHCP is OFF.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

9-5
3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.
INTERFACE screen (2/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [3] key (LAN).

NETWORK (LAN) setting screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (DHCP).

DHCP screen is displayed.

6 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

Supplement
7 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (2/3). It will return to INTERFACE screen (2/3) without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).

8 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

9-6
Set IP address, subnet mask, gateway
When [OFF] is selected in DHCP setting, set these items.
When [ON] is selected in the DHCP setting, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway obtained from the DHCP
server are displayed.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

INTERFACE screen (2/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [3] key (LAN).

NETWORK (LAN) setting screen is displayed.

5 Press the [2] key (IP).

IP setting screen is displayed.

9-7
6 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to set the IP address.
Supplement
Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting
digits.

7 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

It will return to NETWORK (LAN) setting screen.

8 Press the [3] key (SUBNET MASK).

SUBNET MASK setting screen is displayed.

9 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to set the subnet mask.

Supplement
Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting
digits.

10 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

It will return to NETWORK (LAN) setting screen.

11 Press the [4] key (GATEWAY).

GATEWAY setting screen is displayed.

12 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to set the gateway.

Supplement
Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting
digits.

9-8
13 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).
Supplement
It will return to NETWORK (LAN) setting screen.
When you press the [ ] key on the NETWORK
(LAN) setting screen, the Mac address is
displayed.

14 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
When the setting is changed, the plotter will be reset and default screen
It will return to INTERFACE screen (2/3) without
will be displayed.
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).

9-9
9.4 Connecting with RS-232C

For the RS-232C settings, you can recall any setting by storing the four different setting types of 1 to 4.
See "Switching the setting number you want to use" to recall the setting you want to use and See "Changing/
Storing the RS - 232C Setting" to change and store the settings.
* RS-232C interface depends on the sales area. For details, please contact the distributor where you purchased.
* When the RS-232C interface is not equipped, the menu will not be displayed.

Switching the setting number you want to use

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

INTERFACE screen (2/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (RS-232C).

RS-232C setting screen is displayed.
Supplement
It will return to INTERFACE screen (2/3) without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).

9-10
 5 Press the POSITION ( ) key.
RS-232C No. selecting screen will be displayed.

6 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to select the setting number.

Supplement
You can set from setting no. 1 to 4.

7 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

It will return to RS-232C setting screen.

8 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (2/3)

9 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

Changing/storing the RS-232C setting

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

9-11
3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.
INTERFACE screen (2/3) is displayed.

Supplement
4 Press the [2] key (RS-232C).
It will return to INTERFACE screen (2/3) without
RS-232C setting screen is displayed.
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).

5 Press the [1] key (BAUD RATE).

Supplement
BAUD RATE screen is displayed.
Baud rate can be selected from 19200, 9600,
4800, 2400, 1200, 600 or 300.

6 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
Match it to the software you are using.

7 Confirm the setting and press the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

The baud rate is selected and it will return to RS-232C setting screen.

8 Press the [2] key (DATA BIT).

DATA BIT screen is displayed.

9 Press the [1] key (8 BIT) or the [2] key (7 BIT).

Supplement

•
The data bit will be selected and it will return to RS-232C setting screen.
Match it to the software you are using.

• It will return to RS-232C setting screen (2/3)

without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

9-12
10 Press the [3] key (PARITY).
PARITY screen is displayed.

11 Press the [1] key (NONE), [2] key (EVEN) or the [3] key (ODD).
Supplement

•
The parity will be selected and it will return to RS-232C setting screen.
Match it to the software you are using.

• It will return to RS-232C setting screen (2/3)

without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

12 Press the [4] key (HANDSHAKE).

HANDSHAKE screen is displayed.

13 Press the [1] key (HARDWIRE ), the [2] key (Xon/off) or the [3]
Supplement
key (Enq/Ack).
• Match it to the software you are using.

•
The handshake will be selected and it will return to RS-232C setting
It will return to RS-232C setting screen (2/3)
screen.
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (PREVIOUS).

• Enq/Ack setting is available only for HP-GL.

Even if you set to Enq/Ack during GP-GL, It is
set to HARD WIRE..

14 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to RS-232C setting screen.

15 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

9-13
Chapter 10: Settings Regarding
Operation Environment
This chapter describes setting regarding the operation environment.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
10-1 Related to menu display
10-2 Related to sensor
10-3 Related to plotter environment

10-1
10-1 Related to menu display

Display language setting (LANGUAGE SELECTION)

This function sets the language used on the display.
One of ten languages can be selected: English, Japanese, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese,
Russian, Korean, and Chinese.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (LANGUAGE SELECTION)

LANGUAGE SELECTION screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and select the language.

(In these instructions it's explained for when it's set to
English.)

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (1/4).
It will return to ADVANCE screen (1/4) without

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
It will return to default screen.

10-2
Display Length Unit Setting (LENGTH UNIT)
The coordinate values that appear on the display and the other parameters for various settings can be changed
to either meter or inch display.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the [3] key (LENGTH UNIT).

LENGTH UNIT screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (METRIC) or the [2] key (INCH).

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (1/4).
It will return to ADVANCE screen (1/4) without

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
It will return to default screen.

10-3
10-2 Related to sensor

Enabling/Disabling the media sensors (MEDIA SENSOR)

This function enables or disables the media sensors that detect the size of the medium in the feed direction.

CAUTION

Normally, please use it while set to "ENABLED". Turn it DISABLED when setting undetectable media with high transmittance.
When set to "DISABLED", the cutting mat may be damaged. Please be sure to configure the "AREA".

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ADVANCE screen (4/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (MEDIA SENSOR).

MEDIA SENSOR screen is displayed.

10-4
 5 Press the [1] key (ENABLED) or the [2] key (DISABLED).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (4/4).
It will return to ADVANCE screen (4/4) without

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
It will return to default screen.

Enabling/Disabling the push roller sensors (PUSH ROLLER SENSOR)

This function enables or disables the push roller sensors that detect the width of the media.

CAUTION

Usually, please use it while set to “ENABLED”.

When set to “DISABLED”, the cutting mat may be damaged. Please always set the “AREA”.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ADVANCE screen (4/4) is displayed.

10-5
4 Press the [2] key (PUSH ROLLER SENSOR).
PUSH ROLLER SENSOR screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (ENABLED), the [2] key (INSIDE

Supplement
DISABLED), or the [3] key (DISABLED).
If "DISABLED" is selected, push roller detection
is not performed.
It will not generate error even if the inner push
rollers are not on the grit rollers when the
"INSIDE DISABLED" is selected.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement

•
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (4/4).
When "DISABLE" has been set, the home
sensor position is not detected, so depending
on the data, a position error could occur.

• It will return to ADVANCE screen (4/4) without

changing the settings when you press the
[ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

10-6
10-3 Related to plotter environment

Fan suction setting (FAN POWER)

This function sets the suction force used to affix media to the plotter.
It may not feed properly if the media is thin, so set to "WEAK".

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ADVANCE screen (4/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [4] key (FAN POWER).

FAN POWER screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (NORMAL) or the [2] key (WEAK).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (4/4).
It will return to ADVANCE screen (4/4) without

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
It will return to default screen.

10-7
Enabling/Disabling the beep setting (BEEP FOR KEY OPERATION)
This function selects whether to enable or disable the beep that is emitted whenever a control panel key is
pressed.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the [4] key (BEEP FOR KEY OPE.).

BEEP FOR KEY OPE. setting screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (1/4).
It will return to ADVANCE screen (1/4) without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
key (CANCEL).
It will return to default screen.

10-8
Low Movement Speed Setting by POSITION key (POSI. KEY SPEED + SLOW KEY)
Press the POSITION ( ) key and the [SLOW] key simultaneously to set the movement speed when moving
the tool carriage.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ADVANCE screen (2/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (POSI. KEY SPEED + SLOW KEY).

POSI. KEY SPEED + SLOW KEY setting screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

setting value. Supplement
You can set the range between 1 and 15 (cm/s).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (2/4).
It will return to ADVANCE screen (2/4) without

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
It will return to default screen.

10-9
High Movement Speed Setting by POSITION key (POSI. KEY SPEED)
Press the POSITION ( ) key to set the movement speed when moving the tool carriage.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ADVANCE screen (2/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (POSI. KEY SPEED).

POSI. KEY SPEED setting screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

setting value. Supplement
You can set the range between 1 and 15 (cm/s).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (2/4).
It will return to ADVANCE screen (2/4) without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

10-10
Pause key select setting (PAUSE/MENU KEY SETTING)
Set the screen to be displayed when the [PAUSE / MENU] key is pressed during receiving data.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key twice.

ADVANCE screen (3/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (PAUSE/MENU KEY SETTING)

PAUSE/MENU KEY SETTING screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (MENU) or the [2] key (PAUSE).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (3/4).
It will return to ADVANCE screen (3/4) without
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
It will return to default screen.

10-11
LCD contrast setting (LCD CONTRAST)
You can set the contrast of the LCD display on the control panel.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key twice.

ADVANCE screen (3/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [4] key (LCD CONTRAST)

LCD CONTRAST screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease

Supplement
the setting value.
You can set the range between -30 and 30 (5-
step).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (3/4).
It will return to ADVANCE screen (3/4) without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

10-12
Chapter 11:
Settings of Controls from Computer
This chapter describes setting regarding the controls from the computer.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
11-1 Related to command processing
11-2 Related to GP-GL command
11-3 Related to HP-GL command

11-1
11-1 Related to command processing

Setting the command (COMMAND)

There are 2 types of commands, the GP-GL and the HP-GL, that the plotter can use. Match the setting to the
used software, or set it to AUTO.

Supplement

• Automatic detection of the command may make mistake depending on the data. It will give error or malfunction when it has made
mistake. In that case, set the command before using.

• Always send the data when the plotter is in READY status when in the automatic detection of the command.

• Once the data is cut with the automatic detection of the command, it will be ready to automatically detect next command 10 seconds
after completing the cutting. Send next data after 10 seconds has past after previous cutting when sending data with different
command.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (COMMAND).

COMMAND screen is displayed.

4 Select the [1] key (GP-GL), the [2] key (HP-GL), or the [3] key
(AUTO).

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (1/3).

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

11-2
Priority of tool condition selection (CONDITION PRIORITY)
Select the priority of the setting created by different method when the tool condition is set.
All the tool condition that is received from the computer will be ignored, and only the setting and change of the
tool condition from the control panel is accepted when MANUAL is selected. This setting set here is maintained
even if the power is turned off.
On the other hand, it will set the most current tool condition either from the control panel or from the software
when PROGRAM is selected. The values set from the control panel are maintained, and the values set from the
software are erased when the power is turned off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

TOOLS SETTING screen (2/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [3] key (CONDITION PRIORITY).

CONDITION PRIORITY screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (MANUAL) or the [2] key (PROGRAM).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TOOLS SETTING screen
(2/4).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

11-3
11-2 Related to GP-GL command

This section is useful only when using the GP-GL command.

Setting the step size (GP-GL STEP SIZE)

The distance to travel with 1 step can be changed. Match the setting value of the application to be used.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

INTERFACE screen (2/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (GP-GL STEP SIZE).

GP-GL STEP SIZE screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (0.100 mm), the [2] key (0.050 mm), the [3]
key (0.025 mm), or the [4] key (0.010 mm).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (2/3) .

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

11-4
Enabling/Disabling the ' : ' and ' ; ' commands (COMMAND ' : ', ' ; ')
If the first part of the data is lost when the GP-GL command is set, these commands may be having an adverse
effect. In this case, set the ' : ' and ' ; ' commands to DISABLED.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

INTERFACE screen (2/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [4] key (COMMAND ' : ', ' ; ').

COMMAND ' : ', ' ; ' screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (ENABLED) or the [2] key (DISABLED).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (2/3).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

11-5
Moving the pen while raised or lowered in Response to the 'W' command (COMMAND 'W')
Here, you can change the settings for the 'W' command, which is a GP-GL arc cutting command.
This function set the operation upon receipt of the 'W' command for the drawing of arcs.
The pen will move to the specified starting position in the raised status when it is set to TOOL UP, regardless of
the pen’s conditions. The pen will move without changing its condition, to the specified starting position in the
lowered status when it is set to TOOL DOWN.

Supplement
This has an effect on the tool cutter only. For the pen setting, always the pen is raised (PEN UP).

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

INTERFACE screen (3/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (COMMAND 'W').

COMMAND 'W' screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (TOOL DOWN) or the [2] key (TOOL UP).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (3/3).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

11-6
11-3 Related to HP-GL command

This section is useful only when using the HP-GL command

Model ID response (HP-GL MODEL EMULATED)

This function set the operation upon receipt of the "OI" command requesting for the model ID. The reply will be
7550 when set to 7550, and 7586 when set to 7586.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [4] key (HP-GL MODEL EMULATED).

HP-GL MODEL EMULATED screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (7550) or the [2] key (7586).

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (1/3).

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

11-7
Circle-command resolution setting (CIRCLE RESOLUTION)
This function set the sets the resolution upon receipt of the circle-command for the HP-GL pen plotter arc cutting
command.
Select from "AUTO" or "DEFAULT" of 5 degrees.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

INTERFACE screen (3/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (CIRCLE RESOLUTION).

CIRCLE RESOLUTION screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (DEFAULT) or the [2] key (AUTO).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (3/3).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

11-8
Chapter 12: Data Link
This chapter describes setting regarding the data link.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
12.1 Select Connection Destination
12.2 Data Link with USB Memory
12.3 Output with a BarCode
12.4 Start Mark Auto Scan
12.5 Communication Timeout
12.6 Skew Scanning

12-1
12.1 Select Connection Destination

Dedicated data created previously with application software etc. is output to the cutting plotter.
It can be saved in USB memory and output the data saved in USB memory, or output via server (personal
computer) using network (LAN) cable or USB cable.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (LINK).

DATA LINK screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the [1] key (DESTINATION).

DESTINATION screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (USB DRIVE), the [2] key (SERVER (USB))
or the [3] key (SERVER (LAN)).

5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to DATA LINK screen (1/2).

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

12-2
12.2 Data Link with USB Memory

Dedicated data created previously with application software etc. can be saved in the USB memory and output
from the cutting plotter.
Data link can be performed by selecting data from the plotter menu.

Supplement

• File name
• Only 1-byte alphanumeric characters (ASCII) are supported.
• Windows prohibited characters (¥, /, /, ;, *, ?, ", <, >, |, etc. are not available.
• Limit of the number of display characters is 25 characters. More characters than 25 can be displayed by scrolling.
• Extension is "xpf" and "plt".

• Scroll is displayed after a few moments after selecting the item.

• The folder is surrounded by '<' and '>'.

• Name is sorted in ascending order.

• Files and folders can be obtained up to 64.

• Files in the second level folder is not available.

Operation
1 Insert the USB memory that saved the dedicated data to the
plotter.

2 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

MENU screen is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key (LINK).

DATA LINK screen (1/2) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (DESTINATION).

DESTINATION screen is displayed.

12-3
5 Press the [1] key (USB DRIVE).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to DATA LINK screen.

7 Press the [2] key (SELECTS DATA FILE).

Supplement

•
SELECTS DATA FILE screen is displayed.
If the USB memory is not inserted, the
following is displayed.

• If there is no data in the USB memory, the

following screen is displayed.

8 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to select the file.

Supplement
Press the POSITION ( ) keys to change the
folder.

9 Press the [ENTER] key (START).

Cutting starts with the selected file.

10 When the cutting is finished, it will become READY status.

12-4
12.3 Output with a BarCode

The information related to the output file is barcoded using the Cutting Master4 and Graphtec Pro Studio, etc. and
the barcode can be printed with the design and the registration marks.
When cutting with the cutting plotter, the barcode is scanned and the cut data (XPF) that has been saved to a
USB memory that matches the barcode is detected.
Standard barcode Roll paper barcode

Barcode

Start mark

Barcode Start mark

Operation
1 Insert the USB memory that saved the dedicated data to the
plotter.

2 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

MENU screen is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key (LINK).

DATA LINK screen (1/2) is displayed.

12-5
4 Press the [3] key (BARCODE CUT).
Supplement

•
The following message is displayed.
If the USB memory is not inserted, the
following is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (STANDARD BARCODE ) or the [2] key • When the Rotation is set to ON, the following
display is displayed.
(ROLL PAPER BARCODE ).
The following display is displayed.

<Standard barcode> <Roll paper barcode>

• When the Mirror is set to ON, the following
display is displayed.

6 Press the POSITION ( ) key to move the tool to the

start mark position.

• When the Panel Cutting is set to ON, the

following display is displayed.

• In the case of a barcode of roll media, the

following will be displayed for the second and
subsequent sheets.

Supplement
7 Confirm the tool position and press the [ENTER] key.
The barcode is scanned. On completing it, the following screen is • If the start mark is not scanned the following
display is displayed.
displayed.

Check the print result of start mark and the

detect start position etc.

12-6
8 Find the file, and then start cutting.
Supplement

• If the appropriate files are found, select the

desired file.

9 When cutting is completed, it will become READY status.

• If the appropriate files is not found, the

following screen is displayed.

12-7
12.4 Start Mark Auto Scan

When the start mark auto scan is set to ON, the following operation is performed.
If the tool is close to the start mark, pressing the [ENTER] key will automatically scan the start mark without
moving the tool to the scan start position.

Supplement

• It is available only for the start mark of "standard barcode". For "Roll Paper Barcode" it is not available.

• If a mask registration mark is being plotted, there is a possibility to recognize the mask registration mark as a start mark. If a mask
registration mark is being plotted, set the start mark auto scan to OFF.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (LINK).

DATA LINK screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

DATA LINK screen (2/2) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (START MARK AUTO SCAN).

START MARK AUTO SCAN screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

12-8
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to DATA LINK screen (2/2).
It will return to DATA LINK setting screen (2/2)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

12-9
12.5 Communication Timeout

When the communication is lost during connecting to the data link server, the connection will be canceled after a
certain period of time has elapsed. You can set the time until it is canceled.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (LINK).

DATA LINK screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

DATA LINK screen (2/2) is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (COMMUNICATION TIME OUT ).

COMMUNICATION TIME OUT screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) key and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between 5 and 15 sec.

12-10
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key SET).
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to DATA LINK screen (2/2).
It will return to DATA LINK setting screen (2/2)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

12-11
12.6 Skew Scanning

When continuous operation is performed, it is possible to set how much skew allowed by detecting media skew by
comparing the start mark positions of the start page and the current page.
For continuous operation, see “Application of barcode cut (continuous operation)”.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (LINK).

DATA LINK screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

DATA LINK screen (2/2) is displayed.

4 Press the [3] key (AUTOMATIC SKEW DETECTION).

AUTOMATIC SKEW DETECTION screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (5 mm), the [2] key (10 mm) or the [3] key (15 Supplement
mm).
During continuous operation, you can select
from 5 mm, 10 mm or 15 mm for the skew
tolerance.

12-12
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to DATA LINK screen (2/2).
It will return to DATA LINK screen (2/2) without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

12-13
Chapter 13: Apparel (AP) Mode
Apparel (AP) mode is a function to use this plotter in combination with CAD for apparel.
This chapter describes Apparel (AP) Mode setting.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
13.1 Apparel (AP) Mode
13.2 Overview of Axis Adjustment
13.3 Adjusting Coordinate Axes
13.4 Set F Command of Cutting (F_CUT)
13.5 Cutting a CUT DEMO
13.6 Setting a Time Out
13.7 Setting a Separator
13.8 Offline Output from USB Memory
13.9 Running Cutting Tests
13.10 Cross Cut Settings
13.11 Setting Rear Margin
13.12 Setting the Number of Pre Feeds
13.13 Setting Paper Exposure Time

13-1
13.1 Apparel (AP) Mode

When Apparel Mode is set to Enabled, this function is available. For applications other than it, set to OFF.

When Apparel Mode is set to Enabled, the following functions etc.are available.
•
Axis adjustment

• F command

• CUT DEMO

• Time out

• Separator

• Offline output

• Test cut
When Apparel Mode is set to Enabled, the following functions etc. are not available.
•
Registration Mark

• Server and Data Link

Supplement
When the Apparel (AP) Mode is enabled and the data sort tool is set to ON, the tool condition that the TOOL is set to PEN will be
plotted first.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

ADVANCE screen (2/4) is displayed.

13-2
4 Press the [3] key (AP MODE).
AP MODE screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (ENABLED).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to ADVANCE screen (2/4).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

Supplement
It will return to default screen.
When Apparel Mode is enabled, "AP" is
displayed behind the Ready.

13-3
13.2 Overview of Axis Adjustment

For axis adjustment, the inclination of the axis can be adjusted based on the coordination of 2 alignment marks (grit).
In addition, the distance can be adjusted by entering the distance of each point.
Move the tip of each tool to the appropriate point.
Use media that has the plots (grits or alignment marks) required to find the X and Y axis and the origin point.

Alignment mark
The number of alignment marks is 2 points. The position of each alignment mark is as shown in the following
figure.
Alignment with 2 points

2nd point

1st point or origin point

Example of axis adjustment

Before and after adjustment, axis adjustments are made as shown in the following figure.
Media that already cut and set again

Adjusting the
coordinate axes
Adjustment
point 2

Plotting
reference Adjustment point 1
(Origin point of the media already cut)
New origin point
Origin point

Reference of this plotter

There is a misalignment between the X-Y axis and origin The misalignment of the X-Y axis and origin point is
point of the plotter and the media plotted. adjusted and the misalignment is eliminated.

13-4
13.3 Adjusting Coordinate Axes

The following explain how to adjust to coordinated axes.

Supplement

• After aligning, the alignment will be canceled when the following occurs.
· A new origin point is set.
· The media again is set.
· The Rotation is set. (Please set the Rotation before axis alignment.)
The axis alignment point at this time moves according to the Rotation setting.

• When the inclination of the axis is too large in the 1st and 2nd points "Axis Alignment Error: "Set axis adjustment again" message is
displayed.
Please set the media again so that the inclination of the media becomes small, and then perform the adjustment operation.

• If you set the 1st and 2nd points to the same point, the axis alignment will be cleared.

Setting axis alignment

Set to axis alignment mode.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [2] key (AXIS).

AXIS SETTING screen (1/1) is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (AXIS MODE).

AXIS MODE screen is displayed.

13-5
 4 Press the [1] key (AXIS MODE).
AXIS MODE screen is displayed.

5 Press the [2] key (AXIS ALIGNMENT).

Supplement
It will return to AXIS SETTING screen (1/1)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to AXIS SETTING screen (1/1).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

Starting point setting

Misalignment of the origin position and angle of X-Y axis is corrected.
By using this function, you can set again the paper plotted already.
Before aligning the coordinate axes, axis alignment can be performed easily by plotting the X axis line and origin
position so that the origin position and coordinate axis can be known in advance.
Plot the X axis line and the origin position inside the cutting area so that it can be set even in a tilted state.
If the origin position and the X axis are plotted in the immediate vicinity of the cutting area, the set position
becomes outside the cutting area and it will not be able to perform the alignment.

Operation
1 Set the media with the plotted alignment mark.
Supplement
Make sure that the push rollers are on the
media in the area where the media moves.
This alignment is a correction assuming that
the media is set slightly diagonally. If the media
misalignment is too large, the media may come
off.

2 Attach the cutter plunger or pen to the tool holder.

Supplement
When attaching the cutter plunger to the tool
holder, pay attention to the attaching position.
Attach the tool to Tool Holder 1 (forward).
See "Attaching a Tool".

13-6
3 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (AXIS).

AXIS SETTING screen (1/1) is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (AXIS POINT SETTING).

The following message is displayed.

6 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tip of the tool

Supplement
to the alignment mark position.
Pressing the POSITION and [SLOW] keys at the
Move the tool to the position of alignment point 1 (Any point on the X
same time will move the tool carriage slower.
axis already plotted)

7 Confirm the tool position and press the [ENTER] key. Supplement
It will return to default screen without scanning
when you press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

8 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tip of the tool

Supplement
to the alignment mark position.
Pressing the POSITION and [SLOW] keys at the
Move the tool to the position of alignment point 2 (Any point on the X
same time will move the tool carriage slower.
axis already plotted).

13-7
9 Confirm the tool position and press the [ENTER] key.
Supplement
It will return to default screen without scanning
when you press the [ESC] key (CANCELN).

10 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tip of the tool

Supplement
to the alignment mark position.
Pressing the POSITION and [SLOW] keys at the
Move the tool to the new origin point (Point you want to be the origin
same time will move the tool carriage faster.
point).

11 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

The tilt angle of the X axis is calculated and the axis alignment is
performed. On completing it, it will return to default screen.

13-8
13.4 Set F Command of Cutting (F_CUT)

With the feed command in the GP-GL command, set to Cross Cut (ON) / Not (OFF).
When this function is enabled, even if a parameter that does not cut the paper with the feed command is sent,
Cross Cut is activated.

Reference
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the [1] key ('F' COMMAND CUT).

'F' COMMAND CUT screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

Supplement
5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (1/3)
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA SETTING screen
(1/3). without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

13-9
13.5 Cutting a CUT DEMO

To check the operation of this plotter, plot a pattern of cut demo.

CAUTION

Do not place you hand around the moving areas. The tool carriage will start moving, so there is a chance of injury. The tool carriage will
start moving instantly when you select the test pattern plotting.

Operation
1 Load a media larger than A3 size.
Supplement
For more information about how to load a media,
see "Load the media (paper)".

2 Attach the pen plunger to the penholder and select the

Supplement
condition where the pen plunger is set.
• For setting the pen tool, see "Attaching a
Tool".

• For changing the tool condition, see "Selecting

Tool Condition", and for tool settings, see
"Setting the Tool".

3 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.

MENU screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) key (TEST).

TEST screen (1/2) is displayed.

13-10
5 Press the [4] key (CUTTING DEMO).
CUT DEMO screen is displayed.

6 Confirm that pen tool is set properly.

7 Confirm that the moving parts for the tool and media are
CAUTION
operating properly and safely.
Do not place you hand around the moving
areas. The tool carriage will start moving, so
there is a chance of injury.

8 Press the [1] key (START).

Supplement
CUT DEMO plotting starts.
It will return to TEST screen without outputting
a CUT DEMO when you press the [ESC] key
(CANCEL).

9 When plotting is started, the TEST screen (1/2) is displayed.

Supplement
During operation, the keys on the control panel
do not work. When the CUT DEMO output is
finished, they are active.

10 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

13-11
13.6 Setting a Time Out

Regarding the timeout settings, when the data input time to the interface becomes equal to or longer than the
specified time, that point in time is regarded as a data break. All data up to the data break will be plotted, after it,
cross cut will be performed.

Reference
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

INTERFACE screen (4/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (TIME OUT).

TIME OUT screen is displayed.

13-12
5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the
Supplement
setting value.
• You can set 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60 or 120
(sec.).

• If 0 sec. is set, crosscut due to timeout is not

performed.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (4/4).
It will return to INTERFACE screen (4/4) without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. key (CANCEL).

It will return to default screen.

13-13
13.7 Setting a Separator

Regarding the separator settings, the command that is set as separator is judged as the data break when it is
sent. All data up to the data break will be plotted, after it, cross cut will be performed.

GP-GL separator
Set the separator at GP-GL.

Reference
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

INTERFACE screen (4/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (GP-GL SEPARATOR).

GP-GL SEPARATOR screen is displayed.

13-14
 5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to change the setting.
Supplement
You can set to "FS", "H", "J 0", "F" or "-".
When set to "-", cross cut by separator is not
performed.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (4/4).
It will return to INTERFACE screen (4/4) without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

HP-GL separator
Set the separator at HP-GL.

Reference
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (I/F).

INTERFACE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

INTERFACE screen (4/4) is displayed.

13-15
4 Press the [3] key (HP-GL SEPARATOR).
HP-GL SEPARATOR screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to change the setting.

Supplement
You can set to "IN", "DF", "PS", "IW", "SC", "IP",
"SP", "NR", "PG", "AH", "AF" or "-".
When set to "-", cross cut by separator is not
performed.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to INTERFACE screen (4/4).
It will return to INTERFACE screen (4/4) without
changing the settings when you press the [ESC]
key (CANCEL).
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

13-16
13.8 Offline Output from USB Memory

Dedicated data that was created by the application software can be saved in the USB memory and output from
the cutting plotter.
Select the data from the menu of the plotter, and then output it in offline.

Supplement

• Only 1-byte alphanumeric characters (ASCII) are supported.

• Windows prohibited characters (¥, /, /, ;, *, ?, ", <, >, |, etc.) are not available.

• Limit of the number of display characters is 25 characters. More characters than 25 can be displayed by scrolling.

• Scroll is displayed after a few moments after selecting the item.

• The extension is "xpf", "plt".

• The folder is surrounded by '<' and '>'.

• Name is sorted in ascending order.

• Files and folders can be obtained up to 64.

• Files in the second level folder is not available.

Operation
1 Insert the USB memory that saved the dedicated data to the
plotter.

2 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

MENU screen is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key (MEM.).

OFF-LINE OPERATION screen (1/1) is displayed.

13-17
4 Press the [1] key (SELECTS DATA FILE).
Supplement

•
SELECTS DATA FILE screen is displayed.
If the USB memory is not inserted, the
following screen is displayed.

• If there is no data in the USB memory, the

following screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to select the file.

Supplement
Press the POSITION ( ) keys to change the
file.

6 Press the [ENTER] (START).

Cutting starts with the selected file.

7 When the cutting is finished, it will become READY status.

13-18
13.9 Running Cutting Tests

Test cutting can be performed after making the tool, speed, force, and acceleration settings to ensure that the
selected cutting conditions actually produce the desired cutting results. Check how far the blade cuts into the
media and how the corners are being cut. If the cutting results are not satisfactory, adjust the various settings and
repeat the test cutting until the optimal settings are achieved.

Cutting test
Here, you can cut the test pattern based on the current values.

Operation
1 Load the media you want to actually cut.

2 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the default screen.

CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key (CUT TEST).

Supplement
It will return to CONDITION setting screen
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

4 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to move the tool carriage

Supplement
to the position where the TEST CUT is performed.
Pressing the POSITION and [SLOW] keys at the
same time will move the tool carriage slower.

5 Press the [ENTER] key.

CAUTION
TEST CUT PATTERN is cut.
When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the tool
carriage will start moving, so take care not to get
injured by the cutter blade.

13-19
 6 After completing it, press the [ENTER] key.
CONDITION setting screen is displayed.

7 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen.

Confirm the results of the cut test

Confirm the cut test results, and adjust to optimal setting. Repeat cut test and adjustment until optimal cut is
achieved.

Adjustment of offset
See "Setting the Tool" and adjust the offset value if the corner is not cut or if it is cut too much.

Supplement
How to check offset
Check if the offset value is set correctly by following.

Not enough adjustment.

Increase the offset value.

Optimal offset value.

Too much adjustment.

Decrease the offset value.

Check the UP length when cutting.

UP length When the UP length is not enough, those that
are cut during cutting, may come off.

13-20
Adjustment when using cutter plunger
Adjust so the media is completely cut out.
If the media is not completely cut, either the FORCE setting is too low or the cutter blade tip is not sufficiently
extended.
See "Adjusting the Blade Length" and "Setting the Force" and adjust the settings.

Adjustment when using plotting pen

Adjust the FORCE so there will be no faint lines. To prolong the pen life, set the FORCE to the lowest setting
without any faint lines. See "Setting the Force" for setting the FORCE.

13-21
13.10 Cross Cut Settings

Using the values set with the command and timeout specified in separator, set whether performing Cross Cut or
not.

Reference
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

MEDIA SETTING screen (3/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (CROSS CUT).

CROSS CUT screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] the (OFF).

13-22
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA screen (1/3).
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (3/3)
without changing the settings when you press

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key. the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

It will return to default screen.

13-23
13.11 Setting Rear Margin

During timeout or when making cross cut with separator setting, the media is cross-cut t at the position where the
margin value set here is added to the maximum value of + X plotted.

Cross Cut position

Value of rear margin (+X)

Feed direction of media

Rear position plotted

Reference
This setting will be saved even if the power is shut off.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

13-24
3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.
MEDIA SETTING screen (3/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [2] key (SPACE REAR).

SPACE REAR screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to change the setting.

Supplement

• You can set the range between 7.0 mm and

+30.0 mm.

• Press the [SLOW] key to select the setting

digits.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA SETTING screen
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (3/3)
(3/3).
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

13-25
13.12 Setting the Number of Pre Feeds

Set the number of pre feeds to prevent deviations from occurring when the roll media is pulled out. During the pre
feed, the grit roller leaves traces on the paper. Pre feeds can be repeated after paper exposure time has elapsed.
This function is available when the Initial Feed or if Panel Cutting is ON.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

MEDIA SETTING screen (3/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [3] key (PAPER LOAD FUNCTION).

PAPER LOAD FUNCTION screen is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to change the setting.

Supplement

• You can set the range between 0 and 5.

• Cutting/plotting will begin immediately after

the pre feed is complete and data sent during
paper exposure time is received.

13-26
6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA screen (3/3).
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (3/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

13-27
13.13 Setting Paper Exposure Time

This function sets the time the paper/media is acclimated to the operating environment after being pulled off the
paper roll to minimize media expansion or contraction, and prevent it from adversely effecting cutting or plotting.
After the initial feed is complete, the paper will be fed backwards to half the preset feed length and exposed for the
set amount of time.
This function is available when the Initial Feed or if Panel Cutting is ON.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETTING screen (1/3) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

MEDIA SETTING screen (3/3) is displayed.

4 Press the [4] key (PAPER READY TIME).

PAPER READY TIME is displayed.

13-28
5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys to change the setting.
Supplement
You can set to 0, 60, 120, 180, 300, 420 or 600
(sec.).

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA screen (3/3).
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (3/3)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

13-29
 Chapter 14: Cutting with supplied
application software
This chapter describes how to cut with supplied application software

PRODUCT SUMMARY
14.1 Basic operation of printing and cutting
14.2 Basic operation of barcode
14.3 Application of barcode cutting (continuous
operation)

14-1
14.1 Basic operation of printing and cutting

This section explains the flow from creation of registration mark to cutting when dedicated application is used.
Because the procedure differs for each application, see the following depending on the application you want to
use.

• Graphtec Pro Studio / Cutting Master 4

Step 1: Create registration mark (alignment mark) data.
Step 2: Create design data for printing and cutting.
Step 3: Print design data.
Step 4: Cut the printed media.

• Graphtec Studio
Step 1: Create registration mark (alignment mark) data.
Step 2: Create design data for printing and cutting.
Step 3: Print design data.
Step 4: Cut the printed media.

Graphtec Pro Studio / Cutting Master 4

Step 1: Create registration mark (alignment mark) data.

When printing and cutting, it is necessary to attach registration marks (alignment marks) in order to know exactly
the printing position.
Margin is necessary around the registration marks.

When printing on sheet media, the following margins are required.

Right and left
Leading edge Trailing edge
edges
MARK TYPE 1 15 mm or more 35mm or more 15mm or more
MARK TYPE 2 17mm or more 37mm or more 15mm or more

When printing on roll media, it is necessary to provide a margin of 6

mm or more between the registration mark of the first sheet and the
registration mark of the second sheet. In addition, margins of 15 mm
Feed direction of media

Margin
or more must be provided at the left and right edges.
* The printing position may be different depending on the printer you
want to use, therefor It's recommended to take a margin as long as
several mm.

Operation
1-1 Create registration marks for printing and cutting.

When using Graphtec Pro Studio

1 Create rectangles on the design screen using "Rectangle" tool.

14-2
2 Select the rectangles and select "Effects" - "Rectangle to
Contour Cut Mark".

3 Select a type of registration mark on the "DesignCentral"

screen.

4 Press the "Options".

Specify the length and thickness of the registration mark
on the displayed "Graphtec Mark Options" screen.
Press the “OK”.

5 Press the on the "DesignCentral" screen.

Registration marks are created on the design screen.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media
Feed direction of media

14-3
When using Cutting Master 4

1 Create rectangles on the design screen using the

"Rectangle" tool in Adobe Illustrator or CorelDRAW.

2 In Adobe Illustrator, select the rectangle and then select

"Cutting Master 4" - "Registration Marks" from the File
menu.
In CorelDRAW, select "Launch" - "Registration Marks
(CM4)" from the tool bar.
* If selecting from the application launcher in CorelDRAW
version X7 or earlier and, the Registration Marks screen
will be displayed.
Set type, thickness and length of registration mark.
Check the "Convert rectangle".
Press the “OK”.
Registration marks are created on the design screen.
* The following screen is the screen when starting from
Adobe Illustrator.

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

14-4
Step 2: Create design data for printing and cutting.
Design the drawing pattern that you want to print and the contour to be cut.

Operation
2-1 Create print design for printing and cutting.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

2-2 Create cut design for printing and cutting.

When using Graphtec Pro Studio

1 Select the print data and select "Effects" - "Contour Cut

Supplement
Mark".
If this setting is not performed, "Step 4: Cut the
Select the offset value of contour on the "DesignCentral"
printed media" - "Contour Cut Mark" icon in Step
screen. 4-2 is not enabled.

2 Press the on the "DesignCentral" screen.

Cutting data is created on the design screen.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Cutting data

14-5
 When using Cutting Master 4

1 It's recommended that the cut design is created on a layer

different from the print design.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Cutting data

Step 3: Print design data.

After creating the design, print it on the media.

Supplement
Pay attention to the following when printing to prevent registration mark scan from failing when cutting.

• Set the enlarge/shrink scale to 100%.

• Set the printing position (center/lower left etc.) so that the positional relationship between the created document and the printed
result is the same.

Operation
3-1 Print design data for printing and cutting.

When using Graphtec Pro Studio

1 Select the printer to use from the Print menu of Graphtec

Pro Studio and print the created data.

When using Cutting Master 4

1 Print using the Adobe Illustrator or CorelDRAW function.

Set the layer of cut data to Hide before printing.

14-6
Step 4: Cut the printed media.
Cut the media prepared in Step 3 with the cutting plotter.

Operation
4-1 Load the printed media on the cutting plotter.
Supplement

• For loading media, see "Loading Media (Paper

or Marking Film)".

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

• If a registration mark scanning error occurs,
check the registration marks etc. (See
"ARMS".)
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

4-2 Send the cutting data to the cutting plotter.

When using Graphtec Pro Studio

1 Click on the "Cut Contour" icon.

2 The "Cut Contour" screen is displayed.

Supplement
Set the ROTATE to to match the setting direction of The ROTATE can be set only when using
the media. 4POINTS.
Press the "Send". For other registration marks, load the media
according to the orientation of the preview.

Supplement
When the "Cut Contour" screen is displayed
for the first time, the "Add Device" screen is
displayed. Follow the instructions on the screen
to select the model name to use.

• For USB connection, select the "Graphtec

USB".

• For network connection, select the "TCP/IP"

and then enter the IP address of the cutting
plotter.

14-7
3 The confirmation screen is displayed.
Using the cutting plotter's POSITION ( ) key, move
the tool to the lower right registration mark (within the red
rectangle).

Press “OK” on the confirmation screen of Graphtec Pro

Studio.
Registration marks are scanned. Cutting starts when all
registration marks are detected.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Supplement
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

If a registration mark scanning error occurs,

check the registration marks etc. (See "ARMS".)

Move here Move here

14-8
When using Cutting Master 4

1 In Adobe Illustrator, select "Cutting Master 4" - "Cut/Plot"

from the File menu.
In CorelDRAW, select "Launch" - "Cut/Plot (CM4)" from
the tool bar.
* If using CorelDRAW version X7 or earlier, select from
the application launcher.
Before selecting the Cut/Plot, set the layer of printing
data to Hide .

2 "Cut/Plot" screen is displayed.

Supplement
Set the ROTATE to to match the set direction of the The ROTATE can be set only when using
media. 4POINTS.
Press the "Send". For other registration marks, load the media
according to the orientation of the preview.

Supplement
When the "Cut Contour" screen is displayed
for the first time, the "Add Device" screen is
displayed. Follow the instructions on the screen
to select the model name to use.

• For USB connection, select the "Graphtec

USB".

• For network connection, select the "TCP/IP"

and then enter the IP address of the cutting
plotter.

14-9
3 The confirmation screen is displayed.
Using the cutting plotter's POSITION ( ) key, move
the tool to the lower right registration mark (within the red
rectangle).

Press “OK” on the confirmation screen of Cutting Master4.

Registration marks are scanned. Cutting starts when all
registration marks are detected.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Supplement
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

If a registration mark scanning error occurs,

check the registration marks etc. (See "ARMS".)

Move here Move here

14-10
 Graphtec Studio

Step 1: Create registration mark (alignment mark) data.

When printing and cutting, it is necessary to attach registration marks (alignment marks) in order to know exactly
the printing position.
Margin is necessary around the registration marks.
When printing on sheet media, the following margins are required.
Right and left
Leading edge Trailing edge
edges
MARK TYPE 1 15mm or more 35mm or more 15mm or more
MARK TYPE 2 17mm or more 37mm or more 15mm or more

When printing on roll media, it is necessary to provide a margin of 6

mm or more between the registration mark of the first sheet and the
registration mark of the second sheet. In addition, margins of 15 mm

Feed direction of media

Margin
or more must be provided at the left and right edges.
* The printing position may be different depending on the printer you
want to use, therefor It's recommended to take a margin as long as
several mm.

Operation
1-1 Open the "Registration Marks" tab.
Specify the pattern, length, thickness, reference position of
registration mark.
Registration marks are created on the design screen.

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

14-11
Step 2: Create design data for printing and cutting.
Design the drawing pattern that you want to print and the contour to be cut.

Operation
2-1 Create print design for printing and cutting.
For cutting data, specify a color that is not used in print data.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

2-2 Create cut design for printing and cutting.

It is recommended that cutting data be created by specifying
a color that is not used in print data.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Cutting data

Step 3: Print design data.

After creating the design, print it on the media.

Supplement
Pay attention to the following when printing to prevent registration mark scan from failing when cutting.

• Set the enlarge/shrink scale to 100%.

• Set the printing position (center/lower left etc.) to "Not change".

Operation
3-1 Select the printer to use from the Print menu of Graphtec
Studio and print the created data.

14-12
Step 4: Cut the printed media.
Cut the media prepared in Step 3 with the cutting plotter.

Operation
4-1 Load the printed media on the cutting plotter.
Supplement
For loading media, see "Loading Media (Paper
or Marking Film)".

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

4-2 Open the "Configure Cut Job" screen.

Select the "By Color" from the "Apply Conditions" and select
the color to cut.

4-3 Open the "Page" screen.

Supplement
Set the ROTATE to "0°" to match the setting direction of the
media. The ROTATE can be set only when using
4POINTS.
For other registration marks, load the media
according to the orientation of the preview.

14-13
4-4 Open the "Cutting Plotter" screen.

4-5 Using the cutting plotter's POSITION ( ) key, move

the tool to the lower right registration mark (within the red
rectangle).

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Move here Move here

4-6 Press the "Send Cut Job". Supplement

When registration mark scanning starts and all registration If a registration mark scanning error occurs,
marks is completed to scan, cutting starts. check the registration marks etc. (See "ARMS".)

14-14
14.2 Basic operation of barcode

This section describes how to print and cut with the data link function of cutting plotter after creating standard
barcode in dedicated application.
The procedure to read the data linked to the barcode from the USB memory is explained.
Because the procedure differs for each application, refer to the following depending on the application to be used.

• Graphtec Pro Studio / Cutting Master 4

Step 1: Create registration mark (alignment mark) data and design data for printing and cutting.
Step 2: Add barcode data.
Step 3: Print design data.
Step 4: Save cutting data in USB memory.
Step 5: Cut the printed media.

Supplement

• Graphtec Studio does not have a barcode function.

Graphtec Pro Studio / Cutting Master 4

Step 1:
Create registration mark (alignment mark) data and design data for printing and cutting.
See "14.1 Basic operation of printing and cutting" to create design with registration marks for printing and cutting.

Step 2: Add barcode data.

For the data link, it is necessary to add barcode data in order to link the printed print data for printing and cutting
with the cutting data saved in the USB memory.

Operation
2-1 Create a barcode to use the data link function.

14-15
When using Graphtec Pro Studio

1 Click on the registration mark on the design screen.

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

Registration mark Registration mark

2 Press the "Options" on the "DesignCentral" screen.

3 The "Graphtec Mark Options" screen is displayed.

Check the "Use Barcode" and select the "Standard" from
the "Barcode Type". Press the “OK”.

4 Press the on the "DesignCentral" screen.

Barcode is created on the design screen.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

G0100SYAC
G0100SYAA

Barcode Barcode

14-16
When using Cutting Master 4

1 In Adobe Illustrator, select "Cutting Master 4" -

"Registration Marks" from the File menu.
In CorelDRAW, select "Launch" - "Registration Marks
(CM4)" from the tool bar.
* If selecting from the application launcher in CorelDRAW
version X7 or earlier and, the Registration Marks screen
will be displayed.

2 Check the "Use Barcode".

Select the "Standard" from the "Barcode Type".

3 Check the "Keep Registration Marks".

Press the “OK”.
* The following screen is the screen when starting from
Adobe Illustrator.

4 A barcode is created on the design screen.

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

G0100SYAC
G0100SYAA

Barcode Barcode

14-17
Step 3: Print design data.
After creating the design data, print it on the media and prepare the media to be cut.

Supplement
Pay attention to the following when printing to prevent registration mark scan from failing when cutting.

• Set the enlarge/shrink scale to 100%.

• Set the printing position (center/lower left etc.) so that the positional relationship between the created document and the printed
result is the same.

See "14.1 Basic operation of printing and cutting" to print design with standard barcode for printing and cutting.

Step 4: Save cutting data in USB memory.

Create an XPF file (file dedicated to saving USB memory) and save it to USB memory.
When you save cutting data and barcode information in this XPF file, the cutting plotter will be able to find the
correct cutting data.

Operation
4-1 Insert a USB memory into the computer.

When using Graphtec Pro Studio

1 Click on the "Cut Contour" icon.

2 The "Cut Contour" screen is displayed.

Press the "Save to file". Supplement
When the "Cut Contour" screen is displayed
for the first time, the "Add Device" screen is
displayed. Follow the instructions on the screen
to select the model name to use.

• For USB connection, select the "Graphtec

USB".

• For network connection, select the "TCP/IP"

and then enter the IP address of the cutting
plotter.

14-18
3 When "Save As" screen is displayed, specify "USB
memory" to save the "XPF file".
* You can save it to an arbitrary folder and then move it to
USB memory.

When using Cutting Master 4

1 In Adobe Illustrator, select "Cutting Master 4" - "Cut/Plot"

from the File menu.
In CorelDRAW, select "Launch" - "Cut/Plot (CM4)" from
the tool bar.
* If using CorelDRAW version X7 or earlier, select from
the application launcher.
Before selecting the Cut/Plot, set the layer of printing
data to Hide .

2 The "Cut/Plot" screen is displayed.

Press the "Save to file". Supplement
When the "Cut Contour" screen is displayed
for the first time, the "Add Device" screen is
displayed. Follow the instructions on the screen
to select the model name to use.

• For USB connection, select the "Graphtec

USB".

• For network connection, select the "TCP/IP"

and then enter the IP address of the cutting
plotter.

3 When "Save As" screen is displayed, specify "USB

memory" and save the "XPF file".
* You can move to USB memory after saving in any folder.

14-19
Step 5: Cut the printed media.
Using the cutting data saved in the USB memory in Step 4, cut the media prepared in Step 3 with the cutting
plotter.

Operation
5-1 Load the printed media on the cutting plotter.
Supplement
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
For loading media, see "Loading Media (Paper
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

or Marking Film)".

G0100SYAC
G0100SYAA

5-2 Insert the USB memory that saved the file into the USB
memory slot of the cutting plotter.

5-3 Set the menu of cutting plotter.

5-4 Press the [PAUSE / MENU] key.

MENU screen is displayed.

5-5 Press the ( ) key (LINK).

DATA LINK screen (1/2) is displayed. Supplement
Confirm that the "Destination" is "USB memory".

14-20
5-6 Press the [3] key (BARCODE CUT). Supplement
The following message is displayed.
• If the USB memory is not inserted, the
following screen is displayed.

5-7 Press the [1] key (STANDARD BARCODE).

The following message is displayed. • When the ROTATE is set to ON, the following
screen is displayed.

• When the MIRROR is set to ON, the following

screen is displayed.

• When the PANEL CUTTING is set to ON, the

following screen is displayed.

14-21
5-8 Using the the cutting plotter's POSITION ( ) key, move
Supplement
the tool to the start mark (see figure) under the barcode and
If the start mark cannot be scanned, check the
press the [ENTER] key.
print result of start mark and the detect start
position etc.

The barcode is scanned, the corresponding data is read

out from the USB memory, and cutting starts when the
registration mark is completed to scan.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

G0100SYAC
G0100SYAA

Move the center of Move the center of

the tool here the tool here
G0100SYAC
Feed direction of media

Start mark

14-22
14.3 Application of barcode cutting (continuous
operation)

This section describes how to print and cut with the data link function of cutting plotter after creating roll media
barcode in dedicated application.
The procedure to receive the data matching roll media barcode from the personal computer.
By using roll media barcode, multiple designs printed on one roll media can be printed and cut consecutively.

•
Refer to the following depending on the application to be used.
Graphtec Pro Studio / Cutting Master 4
Step 1: Create design data for printing and cutting.
Step 2: Add barcode data.
Step 3: Print design data.
Step 4: Save cutting data in data link server.
Step 5: Start data link server.
Step 6: Set up cutting plotter.
Step 7: Cut the printed media.

Supplement

• Graphtec Studio does not have a barcode (continuous operation) function.

• In continuous operation, even if paper feed command and cross cut command are included in the data, it becomes invalid.

• It's recommended that a take-up device (model-specific option) is used during continuous operation.during continuous operation.

• When using a basket, please do not let the media protrude from the basket.
If you do not use a basket, please make sure that media does not accumulate on the floor. If you do not take action, the media may
skew.

• When doing continuous operation, load the roll media without making slack of the medium at the back of the machine.

• It cannot be used when connecting via RS-232C interface.

Graphtec Pro Studio

Step 1: Create design data for printing and cutting.

See "14.1 Basic operation of printing and cutting" to create design for printing and cutting.

CAUTION

To use continuous operation, select the media size for the design according to the width of the roll media to be printed.
For example, when using roll media of A0 size, select the media size with the arbitrary length specified by A0 (portrait), A1 (landscape),
or A0 width.

Supplement

• Before creating design, select the printer driver to be used for printing in advance.

• Create only design for printing and design for cutting. Then create registration marks and barcode in the next procedure.

14-23
Step 2: Add barcode data.
When barcode cutting is performed in continuous operation, it is necessary to attach a special barcode called "Roll
media barcode".

Operation
2-1 Create registration marks and a barcode for data link
(continuous operation).

When using Graphtec Pro Studio

1 Select "Effects" - "Page Contour Cut Mark".

2 Select a type of registration mark on the "DesignCentral"

screen.

14-24
3 Press the "Options".
Specify the length and thickness of the contour cut mark
on the displayed "Graphtec Mark Options" screen.
Check the "Use Barcode".
Select the "Roll Media" from the "Barcode Type".
The margins of the printer driver selected in the
application are initialized in "Printer Margin". When
changing the printer, acquire margin information by
pressing the "Get Printer Margins".
Press the “OK”.

4 Press the on the "DesignCentral" screen.

Supplement
Registration mark and barcode are created on the design
Registration marks are placed automatically.
screen.
The position cannot be changed.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
G1100JMAA-R G1100JMAA-R
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

G1100JMAA-F G1100JMAA-F

Barcode Barcode

14-25
When using Cutting Master 4

1 In Adobe Illustrator, select "Cutting Master 4" -

"Registration Marks" from the File menu.
In CorelDRAW, select "Launch" - "Registration Marks
(CM4)" from the tool bar.
Set type, thickness and length of registration mark.
Check the "Use Barcode".
Select the "Roll Media" from the "Barcode Type".
The margins of the printer driver selected in the
application are initialized in "Printer Margin". When
changing the printer, acquire margin information by
pressing the "Get Printer Margins".
Press the “OK”.
* If selecting from the application launcher in CorelDRAW
version X7 or earlier and, the Registration Marks screen
will be displayed.

* The following screen is the screen when starting from

Adobe Illustrator.

2 Registration marks and barcode are created on the design

Supplement
screen.
Registration marks are placed automatically.
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
G1100JMAA-R G1100JMAA-R
The position cannot be changed.
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

G1100JMAA-F G1100JMAA-F

Barcode Barcode

14-26
Step 3: Print design data.
After creating the design, print it on the media.

Supplement
Pay attention to the following when printing to prevent registration mark scan from failing when cutting.

• Set the enlarge/shrink scale to 100%.

• Set the printing position (center/lower left etc.) to "Not change".

• In continuous operation, it is necessary that two or more data are printed on the roll media.
It is convenient to prepare printing and cutting data in advance and print them collectively.

• Set the "Cross Cut" setting of the cutting plotter to OFF.

• Print using the printer selected in "1. Prepare the design for data link (continuous operation)".

Operation
3-1 See "14.1 Basic operation of printing and cutting" and print
the design with registration marks and roll media barcode for
printing and cutting.

Step 4: Save cutting data in data link server.

Create a job file and save it in the data link server.
Since cutting data and barcode information are recorded in this job file, the cutting plotter will be able to find the
correct cutting data.

Operation
4-1 Save the file for data link (continuous operation) in the
personal computer (data link server).

14-27
When using Graphtec Pro Studio

1 Click on the "Cut Contour" icon.

2 The "Cut Contour" screen is displayed.

Select the "Hold in list" from the "Send mode". Supplement
Press the "Send". When the "Cut Contour" screen is displayed
for the first time, the "Add Device" screen is
displayed. Follow the instructions on the screen
to select the model name to use.

• For USB connection, select the "Graphtec

USB".

• For network connection, select the "TCP/IP"

and then enter the IP address of the cutting
plotter.

• The explanation here is limited to using a

personal computer instead of the server for
the data link server.

3 Switch to Production Manager.

Confirm that the sent file is held in the "Hold" item.

14-28
When using Cutting Master 4

1 In Adobe Illustrator, select "Cutting Master 4" - "Cut/Plot"

from the File menu.
In CorelDRAW, select "Launch" - "Cut/Plot (CM4)" from
the tool bar.
* If using CorelDRAW version X7 or earlier, select from
the application launcher.
Before selecting the Cut/Plot, set the layer of printing
data to Hide.

2 "Cut/Plot" screen is displayed.

Supplement
Check the "Hold in list".
When the "Cut/Plot" screen is displayed for the
Press the "Send". first time, the "Add Device" screen is displayed.
Follow the instructions on the screen to select
the model name to use.

• For USB connection, select the "Graphtec

USB".

• For network connection, select the "TCP/IP"

and then enter the IP address of the cutting
plotter.

• The explanation here is limited to using a

personal computer instead of the server for
the data link server.

14-29
3 Switch to Cutting Master4.
Confirm that the sent file is held in the "Hold" item.
<Windows>

<Mac>

14-30
Step 5: Start data link server.
Start the data link server to send job file information to the cutting plotter.

Operation
5-1 Start the data link server.

When using Graphtec Pro Studio

1 Click on the "Data Link" icon.

Supplement
2 Each time the icon is clicked, start/stop of the datalink
server is switched. • The cutting plotter supports only one data
link server. Connecting two or more data link
In the start state, a red frame is displayed around the servers to a single cutting plotter may not
icon. work properly.

• When using the data link server, do not use

USB connection and network connection at
the same time. Connect to the interface only
that uses the data link server.

•
Start Stop
When using a data link server with network
connection, always connect with a LAN cable.
When connecting with wireless (Wi-Fi), it may
not operate properly.

14-31
When using Cutting Master 4

1 Click on the "Data Link" icon.

Supplement
2 Each time the icon is clicked, start/stop of the datalink
server is switched.
• The cutting plotter supports only one data link
server. Connecting multiple data link servers

In the start state, a red frame is displayed around the to a single cutting plotter may not work
properly.
icon.
<Windows> <Mac> • When using the data link server, do not use
USB connection and network connection at
the same time. Connect to the interface only
that uses the data link server.

Start Stop Start Stop • When using a data link server with network
connection, always connect with a LAN cable.
<Windows> When connecting with wireless (Wi-Fi), it may
not operate properly.

<Mac>

14-32
Step 6: Set up cutting plotter.
Set the data link connection method to receive cutting data from the data link server.

Operation
6-1 Press the [PAUSE / MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

6-2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (LINK).

DATA LINK screen (1/2) is displayed.

6-3 Press the [1] key (DESTINATION).

DESTINATION screen is displayed.

6-4 Press the [2] key (SERVER (USB)) or the [3] key (SERVER Supplement
(LAN)).
It is not necessary to set the IP address of the
* Select the connection method to the personal computer set data link server in the cutting plotter.
in "Step 5: Start data link server".

6-5 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to DATA LINK screen (1/2).

6-6 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

14-33
Step 7: Cut the printed media.
Cut the media prepared in Step 3 with the cutting plotter.

Operation
7-1 Load the printed media on the cutting plotter.
Supplement
MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2
G1100JMAA-R G1100JMAA-R
For loading media, see "Loading Media (Paper
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

or Marking Film)".

G1100JMAA-F G1100JMAA-F

Barcode Barcode

7-2 Press the [BARCODE] key in the default screen.

Supplement
The following message is displayed.
You can go from the MENU screen to the
Continuous Operation starting screen.
Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the
default screen. The following screen will be
displayed.

Press the [ ] key (LINK). The following

screen will be displayed.

Press the [4] key (Continuous Operation). The

following screen will be displayed.

14-34
7-3 Using the POSITION ( ) key, move the tool to the black
Supplement
rectangle (red frame in figure) next to the barcode.
If the start mark cannot be scanned, check the
print result of start mark and the detect start
position etc.

MARK TYPE 1 MARK TYPE 2

G1100JMAA-R G1100JMAA-R
Feed direction of media

Feed direction of media

G1100JMAA-F G1100JMAA-F

Move here Move here

Feed direction of media

15mm

Width of push roller

Align near the center of the width which is

the forward side of the start mark.

7-4 Confirm the tool position and press the [ENTER] key.
Barcode scanning starts, the corresponding data is read
from the personal computer, and cutting starts when the
registration mark scanning is completed.

* In continuous operation, after cutting of the first data is

completed, the cutting plotter automatically scans the
barcode, receive the data and repeat the cut without
having to perform the previous operation again.
* When media skews beyond the value set in "Skew
detection" of the cutting plotter, continuous operation is
stopped to prevent media misalignment .
For the "Skew detection", see the "Skew detection" in
Chapter 12.

14-35
Chapter 15: Maintenance
This chapter describes the settings for the maintenance.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
15.1 Daily Maintenance
15.2 Replacing Cutter Blade
15.3 Cleaning the Cutter Pen
15.4 Cutter Plunger Exchange
15.5 Setting the Alarm for Degree of Wear (BLADE
WEAR ALARM)
15.6 Replacing the Cross Cut Unit

15-1
15.1 Daily Maintenance

Daily maintenance
During the course of daily plotter operation, be sure to observe the following precautions:
(1) Never lubricate the mechanisms of the plotter.
(2) Clean the plotter's casing using a dry cloth that has been moistened in a neutral detergent diluted with water.
Never use thinner, benzene, alcohol, or similar solvents to clean the casings; they will damage the casing's
finish.
(3) Clean the cutting mat using a dry cloth. In case of stubborn stains, use a cloth that has been moistened in
alcohol or in a neutral detergent diluted with water.
(4) Clean the plotter's paper sensors using a cloth moistened in a neutral detergent diluted with water.
* Never use thinner, benzene, alcohol, or similar solvents to clean the sensors; cleaners such as these will
damage the sensors.
(5) When the Y rail sliding surface gets dirty, gently wipe the dirt away with a clean, dry towel.
* The sliding surface has lubricant on it, so be sure not to wipe all the lubricant off as well.

Storing the plotter

When your plotter is not in use, be sure to observe the following points:
(1) Remove the tool attached to the tool holder.
(2) Cover the plotter with a cloth to protect it from dust and dirt.
(3) Do not store the plotter in direct sunlight or in high temperatures.
(4) Please lower the set lever so the push roller is in a risen state.

15-2
15.2 Replacing Cutter Blade

Replace the cutter blade by referring to the structure diagram of the cutter pen.

CAUTION

To avoid bodily injury, handle cutter blades with care.

PHP33-CB09N-HS/ PHP35-CB09-HS/
PHP33-CB15N-HS PHP35-CB15-HS

Blade-length adjustment knob Blade-length adjustment knob

(Blue)/(Red)

Plunger Plunger

Cutter blade Cutter blade

φ 0.9mm / φ1.5mm φ 0.9mm / φ1.5mm

Plunger-cap Chuck
(Blue)/(Red)
Protective cap

Hole

Hole

Operation
1 Turn the blade-length adjustment knob in the direction of the
B arrow and pull the blade into the plunger.
PHP33-CB09N-HS/PHP33-CB15N-HS

One scale unit Scale

approximately 0.1 mm
Scale

PHP35-CB09-HS/PHP35-CB15-HS

One scale unit Scale

approximately 0.1 mm
Scale

15-3
2 Turn the plunger cap or the chuck in the counter-clockwise
direction to remove it from the plunger.

3 Remove the blade from inside the plunger cap or the chuck.

4 Take a new blade out of its pack. Insert the new blade into
the hole provided in the plunger cap or the chuck.

5 Insert the blade into the plunger cap or the chuck and attach
the plunger from above in that state.

6 Secure the plunger cap or the chuck by turning it clockwise.

CAUTION

<PHP33-CB09N-HS/PHP33-CB15N-HS>

• Please fully insert the cutter blade straight into the plunger cap..
If the cutter blade cannot be inserted straight, please insert the cutter blade after pressing the insertion port of the cutter blade
several times.

Insertion port of the cutter blade

If not installed correctly, it may result in damage to the cutter blade or the plotter itself.

<PHP35-CB09-HS/PHP35-CB15-HS>

• Please fully insert the cutter blade straight into the chuck.
If the cutter blade cannot be inserted straight, please insert the cutter blade after pressing the insertion port of the cutter blade
several times.

Insertion port of the cutter blade

If not installed correctly, it may result in damage to the cutter blade or the plotter itself.

15-4
15.3 Cleaning the Cutter Pen

Letting leftover media and paper dust build up on blades can dull them and cause them to deteriorate. Be sure to
clean the cutter pen regularly and remove build up.

CAUTION

To avoid bodily injury, handle cutter blades with care.

Cleaning
1 Please clean off paper dust and media powder build up from
the blade.
After cleaning it, return it to its proper place.
Spin the plunger cap or the chuck, remove it, and then clean
the blade entrance area.

PHP33-CB09N-HS/ PHP35-CB09-HS/
PHP33-CB15N-HS PHP35-CB15-HS

Plunger Plunger

Cutter blade Cutter blade

Plunger-cap Chuck

Cleaning Cleaning

2 After completing cleaning, attach the plunger cap or the

chuck.

15-5
15.4 Cutter Plunger Exchange

The tip of the cutter plunger gets worn down due to friction with the media.
When the tip of the cutter plunger gets worn down, cut quality suffers.
When the tip of the plunger cap gets worn down, it is recommended that you exchange the cutter plunger.

PHP33-CB09N-HS/ PHP35-CB09-HS/
PHP33-CB15N-HS PHP35-CB15-HS

Cutter Plunger Cutter Plunger

Tip Tip

CAUTION

To avoid bodily injury, handle cutter blades with care.

15-6
15.5 Setting the Alarm for Degree of Wear
(BLADE WEAR ALARM)

This function allows to measure the cut distance of pen or cutter blade and use it as a guide to determine when
the cutter blade should be replaced.
BLADE WEAR DETECT ON/OFF, SET BLADE GROUP, ALARM DISTANCE and BLADE WEAR DETECT settings
are required.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [1] key (TOOL).

TOOLS SETTING screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

TOOLS SETTING screen (4/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (BLADE WEAR ALARM SETUP).

BLADE WEAR ALARM SETUP screen is displayed.

15-7
5 Press the [1] key (BLADE WEAR DETECT.).
BLADE WEAR DETECT. screen is displayed.

6 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

7 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to BLADE WEAR DETECT.
screen.

8 Press the [2] key (SET BLADE GROUP).

SET BLADE GROUP screen is displayed.

9 Press the POSITION ( ) key to select the Tool Condition

Supplement
No. (CONDITION No.).
You can set the range between 1 and 8.

10 Press the POSITION ( ) key and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between 0 and 8.
When set to 0, the alarm will not belong to any
group.

11 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to BLADE WEAR ALARM
SETUP screen

15-8
12 Press [3] key (ALARM DISTANCE).
ALARM DISTANCE screen is displayed.

13 Press the POSITION ( ) key to select the tool condition

Supplement
number (CONDITION No.).
You can set the range between 1 and 8.

14 Press the POSITION ( ) key and increase or decrease the

Supplement
setting value.
You can set the range between 500 m and 5000
m (100m-step).

15 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to BLADE WEAR ALARM
SETUP screen

16 Press the [4] key (CLEAR B. WEAR VALUE).

CLEAR B. WEAR VALUE GROUP screen is displayed.

17 Press the POSITION ( ) key to select the GROUP No.

18 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Supplement
CLEAR ? screen is displayed.
It will return to CLEAR B. WEAR VALUE
GROUP screen without clearing it when you
press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

15-9
19 Press the [1] key (Yes, I clear).
CLEAR B. WEAR is cleared, it will return to CLEAR B. WEAR VALUE
GROUP screen.

20 Press the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CLEAR B. WEAR VALUE
GROUP screen.

21 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

15-10
15.6 Replacing the Cross Cut Unit

Replace the cross cut unit used to cut off the media after cutting.

Supplement
Please replace the cross cut unit according to the guidelines below.

• Paper back film: 1000 mm width media, approx. 3000 sheets (Model: PM-CC-002)

• Plastic back film: 1000 mm width media, approx. 3000 sheets (Model: PM-CC-002)

Operation
1 Check that the power switch is turned off. (the " " side is
pressed down)

2 Remove the screw holding the cross cut unit in place, and
CAUTION
then remove the cross cut unit.
The cross cut unit uses a very sharp blade.
Take care not to cut yourself on the blade.

Cross cut unit

15-11
3 Remove the protective cover from the replacement cross cut
unit.
Be sure to remove the protective cover while holding the part
of the unit shown in the figure below.
Protective cover

4 Attach the replacement cross cut unit, and tighten the screw
CAUTION
to hold it in place.
The cross cut unit uses a very sharp blade.
Take care not to cut yourself on the blade.

Cross cut unit

15-12
Chapter 16: Troubleshooting
Refer to this chapter if you feel something is wrong, or it does not work right.
It also describes the settings of the plotter, confirming the cutting data, and method to create test patterns.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
16.1 Troubleshooting
16.2 Printing the Setting of the Plotter
16.3 Creating Test Pattern
16.4 Creating CUTTING PRO
16.5 Confirm the Cutting Data
16.6 Self Diagnostic Test

16-1
16.1 Troubleshooting

When the plotter does not operate after turning the power on
Symptom Possible Cause Solution
• Nothing is displayed on the LCD panel. There is no power supplied. Check that the power cord is securely connected
Or, the plotter is defective. to the plotter's AC line inlet and the electrical
outlet.
Check that the power is supplied to the electrical
outlet.
Contact your Graphtec customer center if the
problem still exists.
• "Sum-Ck ROM RAM ERR!!" is displayed The ROM or RAM is defective. Contact your Graphtec customer center if the
on the LCD panel. problem still exists.

16-2
When it does not work right
Symptom Possible Cause Solution Reference
• Drops the media while Bright light might be shining Block the light if there is direct sunlight
detecting. onto the media sensor. shining on the plotter that is placed
near the window.
Move away the fluorescent lamps if
there is one close to the plotter.
Media sensor may be Contact your sales representative Enabling/Disabling the
defective. or the Graphtec call center. Set the Media Sensors (MEDIA
media sensor to DISABLED to use the SENSOR)
plotter temporarily.
• Media wobbles. Push rollers are not set Check the position of the push rollers. Loading Media (Paper or
correctly on the grit rollers. Marking Film)
Changing of the hold-down Please set a media suitable for Changing the Hold-down
force of the push roller is not changing the hold-down force. Force
suitable for the media.
• Tool carriage hits the left Push roller sensor may be Contact your sales representative or Enabling/Disabling the
side of the plotter and defective if it hits the left side the Graphtec call center. Set the push Push Roller Sensors (PUSH
"POSITION ALARM" is of the plotter. roller sensor to DISABLED to use the ROLLER SENSOR)
displayed after selecting Home sensor may be plotter temporarily.
the media type. Or, it hits defective if it hits the right
the right side of the plotter side of the plotter.
and "POSITION ALARM" is
displayed.
• The plotter stops with CONDITION setting for the Slow down the speed or lower the Setting the Tool Condition
"POSITION ALARM" media is invalid. FORCE.
displayed during The pen carriage does not Move the object disturbing the
initialization or cutting. move by hitting something. operation, and turn on the plotter after
turning it off once.
External force is applied to Move the object disturbing the
the pen carriage while cutting. operation, and turn on the plotter after
turning it off once.
Movement is disturbed by the Move the object disturbing the
media chaff in the operation operation, and turn on the plotter after
area. turning it off once.
The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or
the Graphtec call center.
• It is cutting with origin point Data created with lower left Reset the origin point to center on Setting Origin Point When
shifting to center of the origin point is received when the application software, or reset the HPGL is Set
media. the plotter is set with center origin point of the plotter to lower left.
origin point.
(With HP-GL command)
• Media jumps out to forward Selected wrong type of the Check the type of media, "SHEET", Setting Feeding Method
side. media. "ROLL-1 FRONT EDGE", or "ROLL-2
CURRENT POSITION".
• Displays command error. Data sent to the plotter is not Check the data. Error Message in GP-GL
correct. Command Mode
Error Message in HP-GL
Command Mode
• It cannot cut above certain Length of the cut is exceeding Press the [SLOW] key and check the Setting Length of the Page
length. the length of the page set on cutting area.
the plotter. Match the setting for the page length.
• There are too many tool up Setting for the tangential Turn OFF the setting for the tangential Setting the TANGENTIAL
and down. mode is set to ON. mode unless you are cutting thick MODE
media.
• It is cutting on the grit roller Cutting width is widened. Please revert the expand limit to the Setting Cutting Width
imprint. default setting.
• Cannot change the tool Setting for the sorting is set to Normally, use the plotter with setting Sorting the Cutting Data
condition. ON. for the sorting OFF.

16-3
 Symptom Possible Cause Solution Reference
• Tool condition changes. Setting of the priority is set to Change the setting of the priority to Priority of Tool Condition
PROGRAM. MANUAL. Selection (CONDITION
PRIORITY)
[ENTER] key is not pressed Check the TOOL CONDITION again. Setting the Tool Condition
after changing the TOOL
CONDITION.
• Media travels tilted. Media is loaded tilted. Reload the media. Loading Media (Paper or
Making Film)
Media is slipping. Perform pre feed once and make Pre Feed of Media
impression to make it harder to slip. (Paper or Marking Film)
Changing of the hold-down Please set a media suitable for Changing the Hold-down
force of the push roller is not changing the hold-down force. Force
suitable for the media.
• It does not become specified Media is slipping. Make the speed slower. Setting the Tool Condition
length. (Slight distance Reduce the moving speed. Pre Feed of Media (Paper or
error) Perform feeding. Marking Film)
Setting the Tool Up Speed
Distance adjust value is not Perform distance adjust. Setting the Distance Adjust
correct.
• "LOAD MEDIA!" is displayed Media is close to transparent Transparent media cannot be Enabling/Disabling the
even if the media is set and and media sensor makes detected. DISABLE the media sensor Media Sensors (MEDIA
media set lever is moved false recognition. (This may and set the cut area when this kind of SENSOR)
up. happen depending on the media is used. Setting Cutting Area
media.)
Media sensor malfunctions Move the position of the light source.
with strong scattered Make is so no direct sunlight shines.
reflection.
There may be defective in the Contact your sales representative or
operation of the media set the Graphtec call center.
lever sensor.
• The PAUSE/MENU lamp Operation restriction Please leave it until the temperature
blinks and the cutting is applied because the goes down. By setting to a lower
operation will be slow down. temperature of the motor has speed, it is possible to suppress the
become too high. motor temperature rise.

16-4
When the Cutting Result is Not Good
Symptom Possible Cause Solution
• Corners are rounded. Blade and OFFSET does not match. Change the OFFSET.
• Corners are too sharp. It is rounded: Increase the OFFSET
It is too sharp: Decrease the OFFSET
• The cut line starts out crooked. The blade inside the plunger doesn't turn Remove dirt from inside the plunger.
smoothly.
• The blade skips and does not The blade is extended too far. Adjust the blade length.
completely cut lines that should be The cutting speed is too high. Lower the speed setting.
solid.
• Straight cut lines seems to wobble.
• Coarse resolution of curved lines. The software's resolution setting is too Adjust the software's resolution setting.
low.
The blade offset angle is too low. Increase the value for the blade offset angle.
• The media curls up at the corners. The blade is extended too far. Adjust the blade length.
• Fine cut characters peels off. Blade and OFFSET does not match. Change the OFFSET.
The cutting speed is too high. Lower the speed setting.
The blade is dull. Replace the blade.
The ACCELERATION setting is too high. Lower the ACCELERATION setting.
• The blade is cutting into the backing The blade is extended too far. Adjust the blade length.
sheet The cutting FORCE is too high. Lower the FORCE setting.
• The blade falls out of the tool plunger. The blade is too small for the tool Use a blade that fits securely in the tool plunger.
plunger.
• Media can be cut but it is hard to weed The retack sheet is not sticky enough. Switch to a stickier retack sheet.
afterwards. Media gets entangled during cutting. Reduce the blade length.
• Cut media cannot be pulled up using
Lower the FORCE setting.
retack sheet.
Cleaning of cut media was postponed Promptly weed cut media.
too long.
• Abnormal noise generated from the Media is rubbed by the tip of the tool Adjust the blade length and the cutting FORCE
tool carriage during cutting. plunger. settings.
• The media is discolored where the
blade has passed.
• The cutting results differ from the The STEP SIZE has been set differently Set the STEP SIZE to same value.
specified size. at the computer and the plotter.
Scaling has been specified on the Check whether scaling has been specified.
computer.
• Currently selected cutting conditions The parameter priority setting is set to Change the setting of the priority to MANUAL.
are disregarded or cannot be changed. PROGRAM.
The [ENTER] key was not pressed after Check the operation.
changing the settings.
• Characters or lines are deformed The plotter is in cutting mode. Select PEN as the tool in the CONDITION
during pen plotting. setting.
• It does not become specified length. Distance adjust value is not correct. Perform distance adjust.
(Slight distance error)
• Characters are deformed. The STEP PASS setting is set too high. Lower the STEP PASS setting.
• Complex drawings are deformed.
• The starting and end points of cutting Coordinate points are incorrectly Check the coordinate data by plotting it with a
do not match. specified. pen.
The media backing is too flimsy. Switch to a media with a stronger backing.
Blade rotation is not smooth. Check that there is no dirt in the blade.

16-5
Error Messages in GP-GL Command Mode
Error
LCD Display Cause Solution
Displayed
E02001 The plotter received an unrecognizable Press the [ENTER] key.
command.
Noise came in when the computer was Configure to drive the plotter from the menu
turned on. of the software.
The software configuration regarding the Reset the interface settings of the software.
output device has been changed.
The plotter's interface conditions have Reset the interface settings of the plotter.
changed.
E02004 A command was received containing Configure to drive the plotter from the menu
numeric parameters that exceed that of the software.
command's permissible range.
The software configuration regarding the Reset the interface settings of the software.
output device has been changed.
The plotter's interface conditions have Reset the interface settings of the plotter.
changed.
E02005 An error occurred in the receipt of data Configure to drive the plotter from the menu
within the interface. of the software.

The software configuration regarding the Reset the interface settings of the software.
output device has been changed.

The plotter's interface conditions have Reset the interface settings of the plotter.
changed.

E02006 The data out of cutting range has been Check the data.
received. Check the size of media and the cutting
range.
Check the magnification setting.
Check the step size settings.

16-6
Error Messages in HP-GL Command Mode

If any of the following command errors occur, they are nearly always caused by following 2 reasons.
1. The configuration regarding the output device in the application software has changed.
2. The plotter's interface conditions have changed.
Perform following if these are the cause of the problem.
1. Reconfigure the output device of the application software to the plotter.
2. Reconfigure the plotter's interface conditions.

Error
LCD Display Cause Solution
Displayed
E03001 An unrecognizable instruction was Execute a recognizable command.
Error 1 executed.

E03002 Wrong number of parameters were Execute the command with the correct
Error 2 specified. number of parameters.

E03003 An unusable parameter was executed. Execute a recognizable parameter.

Error 3

E03005 An unusable character set was specified. Specify usable character set.
Error 5

E03006 Coordinates of command specified out of Execute coordinates within the cutting area.
Error 6 cutting area.

E03007 The data being input exceeds the capacity Adjust the buffer size.
Error 7 of the plotter's downloadable character
buffer, polygon buffer, etc.

E03010 Other output command was executed while Check the program.
Error 10 executing an output command.

E03011 An invalid byte was received after ESC Check the program.
Error 11 code.

E03012 Invalid byte was received within device Check the program.
Error 12 control command.

16-7
 Error
LCD Display Cause Solution
Displayed
E03013 A parameter outside of the permissible Check the program.
Error 13 range was specified in the I/O related
command.

E03014 Too many parameters in the I/O related Check the program.
Error 14 command.

E03015 Framing error, parity error, or overrun error Set the RS-232C transmission condition.
Error 15 has occurred.

E03016 Interface buffer memory has overflowed. Set the RS-232C transmission condition.
Error 16

16-8
ARMS Error Messages
Error
LCD Display Cause Solution
Displayed
E04001 Tilt to adjust with AXIS ALIGNMENT is too Reload the media.
large.

E04004 It is over the setting range of the distance Reset to smaller value.
adjust.

E04005 Could not scan the registration marks. Check the registration scan position.

E04006 Amount of data has exceeded the I/O Decrease the data.
buffer size for the segment area registration
mark.

E04007 Test pattern plotting position is not within Move the media toward center and plot the
the plotting area for sensor position test pattern.
adjustment.

E04008 Media end was detected while detecting Check the media. Check the print position
the registration mark. of the registration mark.

E04009 It has exceeded detection area while Check the media. Check the print position
detecting the registration mark. of the registration mark.

E04010 It has exceeded detection area while Check the media. Check the print position
detecting the registration mark. of the registration mark.

E04011 It has exceeded detection area while Check the media. Check the print position
detecting the registration mark. of the registration mark.

16-9
 Error
LCD Display Cause Solution
Displayed
E04012 It has exceeded detection area while Check the media. Check the print position
detecting the registration mark. of the registration mark.

E04013 It has exceeded detection area while Check the media. Check the print position
detecting the registration mark. of the registration mark.

E04014 It has exceeded detection area while Check the media. Check the print position
detecting the registration mark. of the registration mark.

E04015 It has exceeded detection area while Check the media. Check the print position
detecting the registration mark. of the registration mark.

E04016 It has exceeded detection area while Check the media. Check the print position
detecting the registration mark. of the registration mark.

E04017 It has exceeded detection area while Check the media. Check the print position
detecting the registration mark. of the registration mark.

E04018 Media set lever was lowered. Reload the media and try again.

E04019 There was cancel operation by the user. Redo the process.

E04020 There is a defect in the detection settings Check the settings value.
value.

E04021 Registration mark was not detected in the Check the media. Check the print position
auto detection area. of the registration mark.

E04022 There was cancel operation by the user. Redo the process.

E04023 Registration mark was not detected. Change the color of the registration mark.
Check the media.
Check the print position of the registration
mark.

16-10
 Error
LCD Display Cause Solution
Displayed
E04024 Registration mark was not detected. Change the color of the registration mark.
Check the media.
Check the print position of the registration
mark.

E04025 Registration mark was not detected. Change the color of the registration mark.
Check the media.
Check the print position of the registration
mark.

16-11
Other Error Messages
Error
LCD Display Cause Solution
Displayed
E01001 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the
to E01005 Graphtec call center.

E01006 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the

Graphtec call center.

E01007 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the

Graphtec call center.

E01008 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the

Graphtec call center.

E01009 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the

Graphtec call center.

E01010 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the

Graphtec call center.

E01011 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the

Graphtec call center.

E01012 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the

Graphtec call center.

E01013 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the

Graphtec call center.

E01014 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the

Graphtec call center.

E01015 The plotter is defective. Contact your sales representative or the

Graphtec call center.

E01017 The plotter is defective. Move the object disturbing the operation,
Load on the motor was too large. and turn on the plotter after turning it off
once.
Do not use heavy media.

16-12
 Error
LCD Display Cause Solution
Displayed
E01019 The plotter is defective. Move the object disturbing the operation,
Load on the motor was too large. and turn on the plotter after turning it off
once.
Do not use heavy media.

E01021 The plotter is defective. Move the object disturbing the operation,
Load on the motor was too large. and turn on the plotter after turning it off
once.
Do not use heavy media.

E01022 The plotter is defective. Please clear any obstruction in the up and
There was a heavy load on the up and down function of the tool carriage and turn
down function of the tool carriage. the power back on.
If the error display continues to show,
please contact the store where you bought
the product or our Customer Center.
E05001 Data larger than the buffer size cannot be Perform normal cutting not using the copy
copied. mode.

E05002 There is no data to copy. Perform normal cutting by sending the data,
then use the copy mode.

E05003 Media valid area to copy is too small. Use larger media.
Confirm the copy start position.

E05004 The push roller is not on the grit roller. Set the push roller on the grit roller.

E05006 Distance between the bottom left and top Perform the AREA setting again.
right of the AREA setting is less than 10
mm.

E05007 Test pattern for the TOOL OFFSET ADJ. Set the start position inside the media.
cannot start plotting because the start
position is at the edge of the media.

E05008 External memory (USB memory) cannot be Insert external memory (USB memory).
recognized.

E05009 Barcode cannot be scanned. Check the print result of Barcode.

E05010 Barcode cutting is not available when Set Rotation is set to OFF to use Bacode
Rotation is set to ON. cutting.

16-13
 Error
LCD Display Cause Solution
Displayed
E05011 Barcode cutting is not available when Set Mirror is set to OFF to use Barcode
Mirror is set to ON. cutting.

E05012 The desired file cannot be found in external Save the desired file in external memory
memory (USB memory). (USB memory).

E05013 Start mark cannot be scanned. Check the print result of start mark.
Move the tool carriage above the start mark.

E05014 The selected connection destination Connect to the selected connection

cannot be found. destination using USB or LAN cable.

E05015 There is no appropriate cutting data for the Check the data link server.
data link server.

E05016 The communication to the data link server Check the data link server.
is not established. Increase the time until the timeout.

E05017 Media set lever is lowered. Set the media again.

E05018 A trouble occurs in the data link server. Restart the data link server.

E05019 A trouble occurs in communication to the Set the media again.

data link server. Turn the power off and then on again

E05020 The connection destination is not USB Set connection destination to USB memory.
memory

E05021 The type of Barcode is different. Apply the appropriate Barcode.

E05022 Media skew is detected. Set the media again.

Increase the skew detection set value.

E05023 Data link server is not activated. Activate data link server.

16-14
Caution Message
Symptom LCD Display Description
W06008 When command is set to auto, the DUMP mode is not available.

W06009 When panel cutting has been set to ON, the following functions are not available.
• ARMS function
• AREA function
• COPY function
• BARCODE CUT function
• CONTINUOUS OPERATION function

16-15
16.2 Printing the Setting of the Plotter

Condition setting list can be printed when you need to check the current setting of the plotter.

CAUTION

• Do not place you hand around the moving areas. The tool carriage will start moving, so there is a risk of injury. Tool carriage will start
to move immediately after selecting to print the CONDITION list.

• Once you start printing, pause/cancel cannot be performed in the middle.

Operation
1 Load a media larger than A3 size.
Supplement
See "Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)"
for loading the media.

2 Set the pen tool to the tool holder (Backward) and select the
Supplement
condition where the pen tool is set.
• See "Attaching a Tool" for setting the pen tool.

• For changing the tool conditions please refer

to "Selecting Tool Condition", and for tool
settings please refer to "Setting the Tool".

3 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.

MENU screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) key (TEST).

TEST screen (1/2) is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (CONDITION LIST).

CONDITION LIST PRINT screen is displayed.

16-16
6 Press the [1] key (DONE 1/2) or the [2] key (DONE 2/2).
Supplement
Message to confirm tool position is displayed.
Press the [ESC] key (CANCEL CONDITION) to
return to the TEST screen without printing the
list.

7 Move the tool carriage to print start position by pressing the

POSITION ( ) keys.

8 Confirm that movable parts of the tool and media can safely
CAUTION
operate and press the [ENTER] key.
Selected page of the CONDITION LIST is printed. Do not place you hand around the moving
areas. The tool carriage will start moving, so
there is a risk of injury.

9 It will return to READY status when the printing is completed.

10 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

Supplement
It will return to default screen.
Load the media and repeat steps 6 to 8 to print
different page at this point.

16-17
16.3 Creating Test Pattern

Create a self-test pattern to check the operation of the plotter.

CAUTION

Do not place your hand around the moving areas. The tool carriage will start moving, so there is a risk of injury. Tool carriage will start
to move immediately after selecting to plot the test pattern.

Operation
1 Load a media larger than A3 size.
Supplement
See "Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)"
for loading the media.

2 Set the pen tool to the tool holder (Backward) and select the
Supplement
condition where the pen tool is set.
• See "Attaching a Tool" for setting the pen tool.

• For changing the tool conditions please refer

to "Selecting Tool Condition" , and for tool
settings please refer to "Setting the Tool".

3 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.

MENU screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) key (TEST).

TEST screen (1/2) is displayed.

5 Press the [2] key (SELF TEST).

NOUNT THE PEN! screen is displayed.

16-18
6 Confirm that the pen tool is set.

7 Confirm that operation area of tool and media is safe. CAUTION

Do not place your hand around the moving

areas. The tool carriage will start moving, so
there is a risk of injury.

8 Press the [1] key (DONE).

Supplement
Plotting of the test pattern starts.
It will return to TEST screen without printing by
pressing the [ESC] key (CANCEL SELF TEST).

9 Turn the power off to stop the printing. Supplement

It will keep on printing until the power is turned
off once the printing is started by pressing the [1]
key (DONE).

16-19
16.4 Creating CUTTING PRO

Create a test pattern to check the operation of the plotter.

CAUTION

Do not place your hand around the moving areas. The tool carriage will start moving, so there is a risk of injury. Tool carriage will start
to move immediately after selecting to plot the test pattern.

Operation
1 Load a media larger than A3 size.
Supplement
See "Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)"
for loading the media.

2 Set the pen tool to the tool holder (Backward) and select the
Supplement
condition where the pen tool is set.
• See "Attaching a Tool" for setting the pen tool.

• For changing the tool conditions please refer

to "Selecting Tool Condition", and for tool
settings please refer to "Setting the Tool".

3 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.

MENU screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) key (TEST).

TEST screen (1/2) is displayed.

5 Press the [4] key (CUTTING PRO).

CUTTING PRO start screen is displayed.

16-20
6 Confirm that the pen tool is set.

7 Confirm that operation area of tool and media is safe. CAUTION

Do not place your hand around the moving

areas. The tool carriage will start moving, so
there is a risk of injury.

8 Press the [1] key (START).

Supplement
Start the CUTTING PRO.
It will return to TEST screen without printing by
pressing the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

9 After the completion of print, the TEST screen (1/2) is

displayed.

16-21
16.5 Confirm the Cutting Data

Output of the dump list of the cutting data received by the plotter is possible. It is used to check if the transmission
of cutting data is performed correctly.

CAUTION

Do not place your hand around the moving areas. The tool carriage will start moving, so there is a risk of injury. Tool carriage will start
to move immediately after selecting to print the dump list.

Supplement

• There may be a difference in the RS-232C transmission condition or the command setting when the printed output and the display of
transmission data does not match. Check the transmission condition and the command.

• If the command setting is "Auto", the dump list of the cutting data is not output. Please set the command to "GP-GL" or "HP-GL".

Operation
1 Load a media larger than A4 size.
Supplement
See "Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)"
for loading the media.

2 Set the pen tool to the tool holder (Backward) and select the
Supplement
condition where the pen tool is set.
• See "Attaching a Tool" for setting the pen tool.

• For changing the tool conditions please refer

to "Selecting Tool Condition", and for tool
settings please refer to "Setting the Tool".

3 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.

MENU screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) key (TEST).

TEST screen (1/2) is displayed.

16-22
5 Press the [3] key (DATA DUMP).
DATA DUMP start screen is displayed.

6 Confirm that the pen tool is set.

7 Confirm that operation area of tool and media is safe. CAUTION

Do not place your hand around the moving

areas. The tool carriage will start moving, so
there is a risk of injury.

8 Press the [1] key (DONE).

Supplement
It will return to TEST screen without printing by
pressing the [ESC] key (CANCEL DATA DUMP).
9 Send the cutting data.
The received cutting data (command) is output.

10 Turn the power off to stop the printing.

Supplement
It will keep on printing until the power is turned
off once the printing is started by pressing the [1]
key (DONE).

16-23
16.6 Self Diagnostic Test

Operation status can be tested by self-diagnostic test by operating the sensors and switches following the
instruction on the screen.

Supplement
Diagnostic test can be performed only right after the power is turned on. DIAGNOSTICS cannot be selected from the menu once any
operation, such as loading media, is performed.

Operation
1 Confirm that the power is turned off.

2 Turn the power on without loading the media.

3 In the default screen, press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

MENU screen is displayed.

4 Press the POSITION ( ) key (TEST).

TEST screen (1/2) is displayed.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

TEST screen (2/2) is displayed.

16-24
6 Press the [1] key (DIAGNOSTICS).
DIAGNOSTICS start screen is displayed.

7 Press the [1] key (START).

Messages for testing are displayed on the screen.

8 Operate the keys and the sensors following the instructions

on the screen.
"OK" will be displayed if the operation is detected correctly, and next test
will start.

It will return to TEST screen once all the test items are completed.

Test items are as following. (It may be changed.)

1 Set lever sensor 2 Home sensor 3 Push roller sensor 4 -X media sensor
5 +X media sensor 6 X motor signal 7 Y motor signal 8 Tool height signal
9 [1] key 10 [2] key 11 [3] key 12 [4] key
13 [BARCODE] key 14 [SLOW] key 15 POSITION [ ] key 16 POSITION [ ] key
17 POSITION [ ] key 18 POSITION [ ] key 19 [PAUSE/MENU] key 20 [COND/TEST] key
21 [ORIGIN] key 22 [COPY] key 23 [ESC/CROSS CUT] key 24 [ENTER] key

16-25
Reading the error message
Contents of most current 32 errors can be checked. Errors before that are not recorded.

Operation
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key in the default screen.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the POSITION ( ) key (ADV.).

ADVANCE screen (1/4) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key twice.

ADVANCE screen (3/4) is displayed.

4 Press the [3] key (ERROR MESSAGES).

Supplement
ERROR MESSAGES screen is displayed. Left column is time the error
occurred, and right column is the type of the error. 4 error messages are
displayed at once. If there are more error messages, next 4 messages
• "NO ERROR" will be displayed if there is no
error.
will be displayed by pressing the POSITION ( ) key.

• Up to 4 error messages will be displayed on

the screen. Up to 32 error messages can be
displayed by pressing the POSITION ( )
key.

• When displayed, while the power is on it

indicates how long ago an error occurred.
The lower the value, the more recently the
error occurred.

16-26
5 Press the [1] to [4] keys to see the contents of the error.
Error message corresponding to the pressed key is displayed.

6 Press the [ENTER] key (CONFIRM) when the error message

Supplement
is confirmed.
Press the POSITION ( ) key in the screen of
It will return to ERROR MESSAGES screen.
step 4 as necessary and repeat steps 5 and 6
if there are multiple error messages you would
like to see
7 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
It will return to default screen.

16-27
Chapter 17: Option
This chapter describes about the options.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
17.1 Pouncing (Punch Continuous Holes)
17.2 2-Pen Assignment (Switching the Tools)

17-1
17.1 Pouncing (Punch Continuous Holes)

Pouncing is a method used to create a punched outline on media.

Attaching the Pouncing Tool

Mounting
1 Loosen the tool holder screw.
Bracket to hold tool Tool holder

Tool holder

Bracket to hold tool

Top

2 While pushing the tool holder in the upward direction, push

Supplement
the Pouncing tool all the way into the holder until its flange
Attach the pouncing tool to the half cutting
contacts the upper part of the holder. The flat edge must be
parallel to the tool holder. (backward) side. It may damage the panel if it is
attached to the forward side.

Flat edge

Flange

Tool holder
(Backward: Half cutting)
Top of bracket to hold tool

In parallel

Tool holder
(Forward: Using cutting) Top

17-2
 3 Make sure that the tool bracket is engaged mounted firmly
over the flange, and then tighten the screw.

Flange

Bracket to hold tool

Removing the Pouncing Tool

When removing the pouncing tool, turn it counterclockwise to remove the perforating tool.

Setting the Pouncing Tool

Set the distance of the holes when continuous holes are to be punched.

Operation
1 Press the [COND/TEST] key in the default screen.
CONDITION setting screen (1/3) is displayed.

2 Press the [2] key (TOOL).

TOOL setting screen is displayed. Supplement
Press the [1] key to change the CONDITION No.
It will return to CONDITION setting screen
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

17-3
3 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and set the POUNCE.

4 Press the [3] key (WIDTH).

Supplement
WIDTH setting screen is displayed
Setting range is between 1.0 and 99.0 mm.

5 Press the POSITION ( ) keys and increase or decrease the

setting value.

6 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET).

Setting will be confirmed and it will return to CONDITION setting screen
(1/3).

7 Press the [COND/TEST] key.

It will return to default screen

17-4
17.2 2-Pen Assignment (Switching the Tools)

2-pen type is optional depending on region. For details, please contact the distributor where you purchased.

Attaching a tool
When mounting the tool in the tool holder, please note the following.

• Push the tool all the way into the holder until its flange contacts the upper part of the holder and then tighten

•
the screw firmly.
To prevent injury, avoid absolutely touching the tool immediately after the cutting plotter is turned on or
whenever the tool is moving.
It is explained here using cutter plunger as an example.

CAUTION

When pushing the tool holder with your fingers, the blade tip may be protruding. Take care not to cut your fingers.

Supplement

• When using with half cutting and plotter pen, set the seal in Tool Holder (backward), and when using cutting out (perforated
cut), set the seal in Tool Holder (forward).

• Half cutting means that only the marking film is cut out, leaving the backing sheet uncut.

• Cutting out means that the media is cut out completely.

• Structure of Marking film

Marking film

Backing
sheet

Supplement

• For the "TOOL NO. SETTING", see "Selecting Tool Condition".

• For the "TOOL OFFSET ADJ.", see "Setting Adjustment Between the Tools".

Mounting
1 Loosen the tool holder screw.
Bracket to hold tool Tool holder

Tool holder

Bracket to hold tool

Top

17-5
 2 While pushing up the tool holder, push until its flange
Supplement
completely touches the upper part of the holder.
When using with half cutting and plotter pen, set
the seal in Tool Holder (backward), and when
using cutting out (perforated cut), set the seal in
Tool Holder (forward).

Bracket to hold tool Tool holder

Flange

Tool holder
(Backward: Half cutting/Plotting Pen)

Tool holder
(Forward: Using cutting)
Top

3 Make sure that the tool bracket is engaged on the tool's

flange, and then tighten the screw.
Bracket to hold tool Flange

Removing the tool

When removing the tool, turn it counterclockwise to remove the tool.

17-6
Attaching a pen
Attach a pen to the pen station.

•• Please make sure to attach the pen to the pen station when setting up a pen.
To prevent injury, avoid touching the pen immediately after the cutting plotter is turned on or whenever the pen
is moving.

Operation
1 You can attach the pen by opening up the holder on the pen
station with your finger.

Holder

2 Once the pen is attached, releasing the holder fixes the pen
Supplement
in place.
Make sure to check that the top part of any tools
mounted on the pen station is set in the grooves
above the pen.

Always fit into grooves on the pen.

Removing a pen
You can remove the pen by lifting up the holder.

17-7
Chapter 18: Take-up
This chapter describes how to take up function (option).

PRODUCT SUMMARY
18.1 Precautions (Take-up)
18.2 Nomenclature (Take-up)
18.3 Preparation for plotting/cutting (Take-up)
18.4 Troubleshooting (take-up)
18.5 Appendix (Take-up)

18-1
18.1 Precautions (Take-up)

The TAKE-UP unit is an optional product for FC 9000-140/160.

Notes on the basket

Be sure to use the supplied basket. If not used, it will affect the take-up operation.

Note on the media (paper)

Please observe the following precautions.

• Cut media cannot be used.

• The maximum diameter of roll media that can be loaded is 180 mm and the maximum weight is 20 kg.

• Please make sure to store the paper at the same environment (temperature/humidity) as this machine.

• Please always line up the edge of the paper.

Misalignment may cause media skewing and mis-cuts.
Media skewing can cause plotting and cut offs.

• Set up the tip of the roll media and the paper core properly by referring to "Preparing for cutting".
By setting the end of the roll media and the paper core properly, the taking-up operation can be performed
properly.

• About the paper core:

This machine uses rolls with an internal diameter of 3 inches, or 76.2 mm.

• Mis-cuts or plotting deviations and take-up failure may occur if the paper core is warped or has a larger
internal diameter. Do not use deformed paper core or paper core with a large inner diameter.

• About media flange for take-up

Using the media flange for take-up, the roll media should be loaded .
Secure the roll media so that there is no gap between the media flange and the paper core.

• Always use the "AUTO PRE FEED (PrFEED)" function.

The roll media can start to stretch or contract immediately upon removal from the machine's roll.
The expansion/contraction amount and saturation time of the media changes depending on the temperature
and humidity.
Mis-cuts or plotting deviations and taking-up failure may occur due to the influence of expansion and
contraction.
In order to reduce this effect, be sure to try the "AUTO PRE FEED (PrFEED)" function on media to be used.
For details on how to change these settings, see "Perform Automatic Pre Feed When Media is Set (Initial
Feed)".

18-2
• About using strong resilient media.
The roll media taken up may swell and affect the take-up operation.
If the roll media swells, put tension on the roll media by inserting a paper core with the same width into the
slack part of the roll media. The swell may stop. Be sure to try it before using it.
When a heavy paper core is used, the media deviations may occur. Please use a light paper core that can
take up slack.

The trajectory of roll

media

Paper core

Notes on plotting data

• When taking up, do not cut the perforations.

• In consideration of the overlap of the support media, print a design with a margin of about 500 mm on the
leading edge of the roll media.
• When creating a data, the length of one data should be within 1.2m.
• Set the number of data that can fit on a roll of up to 20 m for the amount of one take-up.

18-3
18.2 Nomenclature (Take-up)

Front View
This section explains in the FC9000-140.

Media flange for take-up

Media guide

Flange guide stopper

Flange guide

Paper core for take-up

Take-up roller (following)

Sensor guard bar Roller lock plate

Take-up sensor unit Take-up roller (drive)

Take-up roller (drive/following)

...................................................... Media that has finished plotting is taken up while rotating.
Media guide �����������������������������Supports media feeding.
Paper core for take-up �����������A core for taking up media. *1
Flange guide ���������������������������A part to receive the media flange for take-up.
Flange guide stopper ��������������Secures the flange guide.
Take-up sensor unit ����������������Detects the presence of media to be taken up.
Sensor guard bar ��������������������Protects the basket from touching the take-up sensor unit.
Roller lock plate ����������������������This is a plate for fixing the take-up roller (drive).
*1: Please prepare a 3-inch (76.2 mm) paper core of the same length as the roll media to be taken up.

18-4
Rear view
This section explains in the FC9000-140.

Media flange for take-up

Media flange for take-up ��������Supports media feeding.

18-5
18.3 Preparation for plotting/cutting (Take-up)

Loading roll media (paper)

This section explains in the FC9000-140.

CAUTION

• Please be careful not to get your fingers pinched on the media flange and rollers etc. when loading the media.

• Deviations and errors may result if the stock shaft is misaligned when plotting begins.

Mounting (Mounting the stock shaft)

1 Set up the stopper supplied in the cutting plotter in one stock
shaft.
(Keep the stopper screws slightly loose preliminarily.)

Stock shaft

Stoppers

2 Insert the stock shaft into the media stocker.

Make sure the stock shaft touches the roller.
* If using a TAKE-UP unit, insert the stock shaft into the
U-shaped groove on both ends of the media stocker.

Media stocker
Stock shaft

Roller

18-6
Operation (Loading roll media)
1 Lower the media set lever to raise the push rollers.
Push roller

Media set lever

Media sensor

2 Loosen the knob of the media flange and insert it firmly to

Supplement
both ends of the paper core of the media as shown in the
figure. Then turn the knob and tighten it firmly. • The size of roll media that can be loaded
depends on the size of the machine.
* Secure the roll media so that there is no gap between
the media flange and the paper core. It can cause media • The maximum diameter of roll media that
can be loaded is 180 mm and the maximum
skewing. weight is 20 kg.

Knob

Roll media
Secure the roll media
so that there is no gap
between the media flange
and the paper core.
Media flange

Media flange

18-7
3 Load the roll media on the stock shaft so that the tip of roll
CAUTION
media is facing upward.
If the screw of the stopper is loose, media skew
Determine the position of the roll media and hold the roll
may occur. Please tighten the stopper screw
media with the supplied stopper. Once the position is
firmly.
determined, tighten the stopper screw to secure it.

Stopper

Stopper

4 Push the tip of the roll media forward from the back of the
FC9000. Make sure to pull it so that there is no slackening
across the roll media's route.

18-8
5 Lock the media stopper (Raise while pulling forward) and pull
Supplement
it out evenly so that the roll media is straight. Please load so
When cutting, slide to unlock the media stopper
that the roll media always rests on the media sensor.
(Pull down the media stopper.).

Media sensor

Lock

Media sensor Media stopper

6 Position the media and the push rollers to correspond with

the width of the media.
See "Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)" and "Aligning
the Push Rollers" in Chapter 2.

7 Pull the media taut to make sure that there is no slack in the CAUTION
conveyance path, and then raise the media set lever to lower
the push rollers.
• During a cutting operation, be sure to keep
your hands, hair, and so forth away from the

Release the lock from the media stopper (Pull the media media stocker and stock shaft.

stopper forward and lower it.) • Please be careful not to get your fingers
pinched on the media flange for take-up and
stock shafts etc. when loading the media.

• Deviations and errors may result if the stock

shaft is misaligned when plotting begins.

Media set lever

Slide the
media stopper

Media stopper

18-9
Preparing for take-up
This section explains in the FC9000-140.

CAUTION

• During a cutting operation, be sure to keep your hands, hair, and so forth away from the media stocker, media flange and rollers.

• Please be careful not to get your fingers pinched on the media flange and rollers etc. when loading the media.

• Deviations and errors may result if the stock shaft is misaligned when plotting begins.

• Always open the basket during the take-up operation.

• Due to the structure, the roll media is slacked by about 200 mm after the completion of the take-up operation.

Attaching (Setting the paper core)

1 Loosen the knob of the media flange and insert it firmly to
both ends of the paper core for take-up as shown in the
figure. Then turn the knob and tighten it firmly.
* Secure the roll media so that there is no gap between the
media flange and the paper core. The gap can cause media
skewing.
* Use a paper core of the same size as the width of the
media to be taken up.
Knob

Secure the roll media

Paper core for take-up so that there is no gap
between the media flange
and the paper core.
Media flange

Media flange

18-10
2 Loosen the screw of the flange guide stopper and move
the flange guide. Place the media flange for take-up on the
rubber part and take-up roller (following).
* If the media flange is not placed properly on the flange
guide, it can cause take-up problems.

Stopper

Flange guide

Take-up roller (following) Take-up roller (drive)

3 Make sure that the take-up side flange end face and the
CAUTION
stocker side flange end face are aligned and set them. After
setting, tighten the screw of the flange guide stopper. If the screw of the flange guide stopper is loose,
media skew may occur. Please tighten the
* If the end faces are not aligned properly, the roll media may
stopper screw firmly.
not be taken up well.

Media flange (media stocker side)

Align the end faces

Align the end faces

Media flange (take-up side) Flange guide stopper

18-11
4 Cut the loaded roll media (or media of the same width) to
about 1.2 m and prepare the support media. Make the cutting
end face as straight as possible.
Same width as loaded roll media

90° 90°
Feed direction of media

Approx. 1.2 m

Cut straight horizontally

90° 90°

5 Paste a support media straight and evenly to the paper core

for take-up.
Pass the pasted support media between the take-up roller
(drive) and the center bar.
* If the support media is not pasted straight, it may cause
take-up problems.
* Please change the pasting place according to the length of
the media.

Tape

Center bar

Support media Trajectory of support media

18-12
6 Hold the center portion of the media guide and pull it along
the groove in the media guide bracket.

Media guide

Media bracket

Media guide

7 Pull up the support media to the machine’s cutting mat

surface.
Media

Support media

Trajectory of support media

At this time, the support

media is in tension state.

18-13
8 Stick and secure the loaded roll media and the support
media using tape.
At the time of pasting, make sure that the end of the roll
media is facing up and stick straight.
The overlapping area should be approximately 1 cm.
* Please change the pasting place according to the media
length.
* In consideration of overlapping with the support media, print
a design with a margin of approx. 500 mm at the leading
edge of the roll media.
Roll media
Tape

Roll media

Approx. 1 cm

Support media

9 After securing with tape, feed the roll media to a position

where the overlapping portion between the roll media and
support media does not overlap the media guide, and set
that position as the origin.
See "Loading Media (Paper or Marking Film)" in Chapter 2.

Media guide

Overlapping
portion

18-14
Set the take-up function
When using the take-up function, set the take-up sensor to ON and AUTO PRE FEED (PrFEED) to ON, and set
the same setting as the length of one job.

CAUTION

• When taking up, do not cut the perforations.

• In consideration of overlapping with the support media, print a design with a margin of approx. 500 mm at the leading edge of the roll
media.

• The length of one job should be set within 1.2 m.

• When setting the number of data, take up to 20 m at one time.

• If the TAKE-UP unit is not properly installed, the take-up menu will not be displayed.

• When applying “continuous operation”, the media feed operation dedicated to continuous operation is performed even if Automatic
Pre Feed (PrFEED) is not set to ON.

• Always open the basket during the take-up operation.

• Due to the structure, the roll media is slacked by about 200 mm after the completion of the take-up operation.

Operation: Setting the take-up to ON

1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed.

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETING screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the POSITION ( ) key.

MEDIA SETING screen (2/2) is displayed.

18-15
4 Press the [4] key (TAKE-UP).
TAKE-UP screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (TAKE UP SENSOR).

TAKE-UP SENSOR screen is displayed.

6 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to TAKE-UP screen.
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (2/2)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

7 Press the [2] key (EXECUTE TAKE-UP) to take up.

Supplement
When “TAKE UP SENSOR” is set to ON, take-
8 Press the [ESC] key (CANCEL) after taking up. up operation is executed after completing one

It will return to MEDIA SETING screen (2/2). cut job.

9 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

It will return to default screen.

18-16
Operation: Set AUTO PRE FEED (PrFEED) to ON
1 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.
MENU screen is displayed..

2 Press the [4] key (MEDIA).

MEDIA SETING screen (1/2) is displayed.

3 Press the [2] key (AUTO PRE FEED).

AUTO PRE FEED screen is displayed.

4 Press the [1] key (OFF).

AUTO PRE FEED screen is displayed.

5 Press the [1] key (ON) or the [2] key (OFF).

Supplement
AUTO PRE FEED is selected, and it returns to the AUTO PRE FEED
It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2)
screen.
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (RETURN).

6 Press the [2] key (FEED LENGTH).

FEED LENGTH screen is displayed.

18-17
7 Increase or decrease the setting value using POSITION ( )
Supplement
key.
• The feed length can be set in units of 0.1 m.

• You can set the range between 0.5m and 50.0

m.

• Press the [SLOW] key to change the setting

digits.

8 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (PREVIOUS).

The feed length will be selected and it will return to AUTO PRE FEED
screen.

9 Confirm the setting and press the [ENTER] key (SET). Supplement
Setting will be confirmed and it will return to MEDIA setting screen (1/2). It will return to MEDIA SETTING screen (1/2)
without changing the settings when you press
the [ESC] key (CANCEL).

10 Press the [PAUSE/MENU] key.

Supplement
It returns to default screen.
When AUTO PRE FEED is set, the mark is
displayed on the right side of the screen. See
"How to Use Control Panel".

18-18
18.4 Troubleshooting (take-up)

This section describes how to clear troubles.

Take-up operation is not performed

Possible Cause Solution Reference
There is no power supplied. Make sure that the take-up roller cable or "Assembling Manual" of TAKE-UP unit
take-up sensor cable is properly connected
to the connector on the cutting plotter.
Sensor is not responding. Make sure that the sensor unit is "Assembling Manual" of TAKE-UP unit
not blocked by media or a basket.
Alternatively, check that the take-up
sensor cable is properly connected to
the connector on the cutting plotter.
The TAKE-UP is not set to ON. Make sure that the TAKE-UP is set to Setting the take-up function
ON.
Machine failure. Contact your sales representative or the
Graphtec customer center if the problem
still exists.

Media take-up is skewed

Possible Cause Solution Reference
Push rollers are not set properly on the Check the position of the push roller. Load a media (paper or marking film)
grit rollers.
Changing of the hold-down force of the Please set a media suitable for changing Hold-down force
push roller is not suitable for the media. the hold-down force.
Roll media or paper core for take-up is Set roll media or paper core for take-up Preparing to Cut (Take-up)
not set properly. properly.
The stocker and the stoppers of media Secure the stockers and the stoppers of Preparing to Cut (Take-up)
guide are not secured. media guide.
The path of media to be taken up is not Set the path of media to be taken up. Preparing to Cut (Take-up)
properly set.

Abnormal noise occurs during operation of the take-up roller

Possible Cause Solution Reference
The roller lock plate is not secured. Secure the roller lock plate firmly. "Assembling Manual" of TAKE-UP unit.
Machine failure. Contact your sales representative or the
Graphtec customer center if the problem
still exists.

18-19
Take-up operation is performed arbitrarily
Possible Cause Solution Reference
Sensor response does not stop. Make sure that the sensor unit is not Preparing to Cut (Take-up)
blocked by media or a basket.

Roll media is loosely taken up

Possible Cause Solution Reference
Media is strong resilient. Put tension on the roll media by inserting Preparing to Cut (Take-up)
a paper core with the same width into the
slack part that can be done at the time of
take-up. The swell may stop.
The paper core for take-up runs idle. Make sure that the stopper of the media Preparing to Cut (Take-up)
guide and the media flange for take-up
are firmly secured.

18-20
18.5 Appendix (Take-up)

Specification
TAKE-UP unit TAKE-UP unit
for FC 9000-140 for FC 9000-160
(OPH-A43) (OPH-A43)
Max. take-up length 80 m
Accuracy guaranteed take-up 20m in 1 job 1.2m or less
length
Rollable paper width 200 to 1372 mm 200 to 1626 mm
Loadable roll media weight 20 kg
Loadable roll media diameter 180 mm

18-21
External Dimensions

D1
H

W D2

Unit: mm
Dimensional accuracy: ±5mm

FC9000-140 FC9000-160
External dimensions 1970 x 1151 (840) x 1232 2224 x 1151 (840) x 1232
(approx.)
(W × D1 (D2) × H)*
Unit: mm
Weight ( Approx.)* 81 kg 88 kg

*: Stand and basket are included.

18-22
Appendix
This chapter describes the specification of the plotter.

PRODUCT SUMMAR
A.1 Main Specifications
A.2 Options and Supplies
A.3 External Dimensions
A.4 Menu Tree
A.5 Initial Setting

A-1
A.1 Main Specifications

FC9000-75 FC9000-100 FC9000-140 FC9000-160

CPU 32bit CPU
Configuration Grit-rolling plotter
Drive Digital servo
Max. Cut Area 762 mm × 50 m 1067 mm × 50 m 1372 mm × 50 m 1626 mm × 50 m
Guaranteed precision 742 mm × 15 m 1047 mm × 10 m 1352 mm × 10 m 1607 mm × 10 m
cutting area *1 *2 894 mm× 15 m 894 mm × 15 m 894 mm × 15 m
Mountable media width *3 Min: 50 mm Min: 50 mm Min: 50 mm Min: 50 mm
Max: 920 mm Max: 1224 mm Max: 1529 mm Max: 1850 mm
Available roll media Max. diameter: 200 mm, Min. diameter: 76 mm
diameter * Maximum diameter is 160 mm when paper flange (option) is installed
The number of push rollers 2 3 4 4
Max. cutting speed 148.5 cm/s (45°direction)
105 cm/s (Axis direction)
Specifiable speeds 1 to 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 100, 105
(cm/s)
Max. cutting force 5.88N (600gf)
Min. character size 5 mm (0.197 in.) alphanumeric Helvetica med. Font *1
Mechanical resolution 0.005mm
Programmable resolution GP-GL : 0.1/0.05/0.025/0.01 mm
HP-GL*4 : 0.025 mm
Repeatable accuracy *1 0.1 mm/in unit of 2 m (Designated Film and Cut Conditions)
Number of cutters/pens 1 pc.
Usable pen type Water-based fiber-tip and oil-based ballpoint
Compatible media Mono-vinyl chloride media, fluorescent media, and reflective media up to 0.25 mm thick (Excluding high-
intensity reflective film)
Interface USB2.0 (Full Speed) , Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, RS-232C *6
Buffer memory 2 MB
Resident command sets GP-GL/HP-GL *4 (Control panel switching, Auto switching)
LCD display Graphic type (240 × 128 dot)
Power supply AC100-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption 140 VA or less
Operating environment 10 to 35℃, 35 to 75 % R.H. (non-condensing)
Guaranteed accuracy 16 to 32℃, 35 to 70 % R.H. (non-condensing)
environment
External dimensions 1360 mm × 1151 mm × 1665 mm × 1151 mm × 1970 mm × 1151 mm × 2224 mm × 1151 mm ×
(Approx.) 1232 mm 1232 mm 1232 mm 1232 mm
(W × D × H) *5

Weight ( Approx.) *5 49 kg 56 kg 64 kg 70 kg

*1: Varies depending on the type of Graphtec-authorized film and the cutting conditions.
*2: When using basket.
*3: Describes the usable paper width. The accuracy of minimum media width is the width in parentheses ( ).
*4: HP-GL is a registered trademark of the US Hewlett Packard Company.
*5: Stand and basket are included.
*6: RS-232C interface is optional depending on region. For details, please contact the distributor where you purchased.

A-2
A.2 Options and Supplies

Supplies
Item Model Contents
Cutter plunger PHP33-CB09N-HS Used with φ0.9 mm diameter cutter blades (for CB09)
PHP33-CB15N-HS Used with φ1.5 mm diameter cutter blades (for CB15)
PHP35-CB09-HS Used with φ0.9 mm diameter cutter blades (for CB09)
PHP35-CB15-HS Used with φ1.5 mm diameter cutter blades (for CB15)
Water-based fiber-tip pen plunger PHP31-FIBER Plunger for water-based fiber-tip pen (set of 1)
Oil-based ballpoint pen plunger PHP34-BALL Plunger for oil-based fiber-tip pen (set of 1)
Water-based fiber-tip pen KF700-BK 1 set (10 pcs. Black)
KF700-RD 1 set (10 pcs. Red)
Oil-based ballpoint pen KB700-BK 1 set (10 pcs. Black)
Pouncing pen PPA33-TP12 φ1.2 mm plunger, 1 needle
Cross cut blade PM-CC-002 1 set

For detailed information about the cutter blade, refer to the Cutter Blade Manual.
Please check our company's home page for the latest information on supplies.

Options
Item Model Contents Quantity
Take-up unit OPH-A43 Used with FC9000-140 1 set
OPH-A44 Used with FC9000-160 1 set
Flange set *1 OPH-A21 Used with FC9000 1 set

*1: The flange set will be standard accessories according to the sales area
Optional items may vary depending on the area. For details, please contact the distributor where you purchased.
Please check our company's home page for the latest information on options.

A-3
A.3 External Dimensions

D1
H

W D2

Unit: mm
Dimensional accuracy: ±5mm

FC9000-75 FC9000-100 FC9000-140 FC9000-160

External dimensions 1360 × 1151 (840) × 1232 1665 × 1151 (840) × 1232 1970 × 1151 (840) × 1232 2224 × 1151 (840) × 1232
(approx.)
(W × D1 (D2) × H)*
Unit: mm

*: Stand and basket are included.

A-4
A.4 Menu Tree
* Menu tree when AP mode is disabled

Default screen

CONDITION
setting (1/3)

[COND/TEST] [1]

[ENTER]

[2]

[COPY]

[3]

[4]

CONDITION
setting (2/3)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

CONDITION
setting (3/3)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Continued

A-5
Default screen
(Continued)

MENU screen TOOLS SETTING (1/4)

[PAUSE/MENU] [1] [2]

[3]

[4]

TOOLS SETTING (2/4)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

TOOLS SETTING (3/4)

[1]

[2]

[3]

TOOLS SETTING (4/4)

[1]

[2]

Continued

A-6
Default screen
(Continued)

MENU screen ARMS SETTING (1/3)

[PAUSE/MENU] [2] [1]

[2]

[3]

ARMS SETTING (2/3)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

ARMS SETTING (3/3)

[1]

[2]

[3]

Continued

A-7
Default screen
(Continued)

MENU screen AREA PARAMETERS (1/2)

[PAUSE/MENU] [3] [1]

[2]

[3]

AREA PARAMETERS (2/2)

[1]

[2]

Continued

A-8
Default screen
(Continued)

MENU screen MEDIA SETTING (1/2)

[PAUSE/MENU] [4] [1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

MEDIA SETTING (2/2)

[1]

*
* When the TAKE-UP unit is attached
[2]

[3]

[4]

Continued

A-9
Default screen
(Continued)

MENU screen INTERFACE (1/3)

[PAUSE/MENU] [ ] [1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

INTERFACE (2/3)

[1]
*

* When the RS-232C interface is installed

[2]

[3]

[4]

INTERFACE (3/3)

[1]

[2]

Continued

A-10
Default screen
(Continued)

MENU screen ADVANCE (1/4)

[PAUSE/MENU] [ ] [1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

ADVANCE (2/4)

[1]

[2]

[3]

ADVANCE (3/4)

[1]

[2]

[4]

ADVANCE (4/4)

[1]

* FC9000-100/140/160 only

[2]

[3]

[4]

Continued

A-11
Default screen
(Continued)

MENU screen TEST (1/2)

[PAUSE/MENU] [ ] [1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

TEST (2/2)

[1]

Continued

A-12
Default screen
(Continued)

MENU screen DATA LINK (1/2)

[PAUSE/MENU] [ ] [1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

DATA LINK (2/2)

[1]

[2]

[3]

Default screen
(Finish)

A-13
A.5 Initial Setting

Menu items Setting item Initial value

TOOLS SETTING TOOL OFFSET ADJ. –
(TOOL) STEP PASS 1
OFFSET FORCE 7
OFFSET ANGLE 30
DATA SORTING OFF
CONDITION PRIORITY PROGRAM
TOOL SELECT COMMAND SETTING ENABLED
TOOL UP MOVE DISABLED
MOVING SPEED AUTO
TOOL UP HEIGHT NORMAL POSITION
BLADE WEAR ALARM SETUP OFF
INITIAL B. ANGLE POSITION 2mm BELOW
ARMS SETTING SCAN MODE MODE1
(ARMS) RECOMMENDED SETTINGS –
MARK LINE CHECK –
SENSOR OFFSET ADJ.(X) 0
SENSOR OFFSET ADJ.(Y) 0
MARK AUTO SCAN ON
SENSING SPEED 30cm/s
TEST ARMS SENSOR –
ARMS CROSSCUT OFF
MARK SCAN MODE OFF
AREA PARAMETERS SCALE 1
(AREA) ROTATE OFF
MIRROR OFF
AREA SET LOWER LEFT (DEFAULT)
AREA SET UPPER RIGHT (DEFAULT)
EXPAND (DEFAULT)
MEDIA SETTING PRE FEED FEED LENGTH 1m
(MEDIA) AUTO PRE FEED OFF
AUTO PRE FEED FEED LENGTH 1m
PAGE LENGTH 200.0cm
INITIAL FEED OFF
FEED SPEED NORMAL POSITION
CROSS CUT FORCE 30
PANEL CUTTING OFF
DIVIDE LENGTH 100.0cm
TAKE-UP OFF
INTERFACE COMMAND AUTO
(I/F) HP-GL ORIGIN POINT LOWER LEFT
HP-GL MODEL EMULATED 7586
GP-GL STEP SIZE 0.100mm
RS-232C (SWITCHING SETTING NUMBERS) No.1
RS232C: FORWARDING CONDITION RS-232C No.1 : 9600/8/NONE//HARD
BAUD RATE/DATA BIT/ RS-232C No.2 : 9600/7/EVEN//HARD
PARITY/HARDWIRE HANDSHAKE RS-232C No.3 : 9600/8/EVEN/XonXoff
RS-232C No.4 : 9600/8/EVEN/XonXoff
LAN DHCP OFF
LAN IP 192.168.0.1
LAN SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0
LAN GATEWAY 192.168.0.254
COMMAND ':',';' ENABLED
COMMAND 'W' TOOL UP
CIRCLE RESOLUTION DEFAULT

A-14
 Menu items Setting item Initial value
ADVANCE MOVE STEP 0.1mm
(ADV.) LANGUAGE SELECTION Select when initially turning on power
LENGTH UNIT Select when initially turning on power
BEEP FOR KEY OPE. ON
POSI. KEY SPEED + SLOW KEY 1cm/s
POSI. KEY SPEED 10cm/s
AP MODE DISABLED
PAUSE/MENU KEY SETTING PAUSE
USER KEY SETTING ENABLED
LCD CONTRAST 0
MEDIA SENSOR ENABLED
PUSH ROLLER SENSOR ENABLED
FAN POWER NORMAL POSITION
TEST NO SETTINGS –
(TEST)
DATA LINK DESTINATION USB DRIVE
(LINK) START MARK AUTO SCAN OFF
COMMUNICATION TIME OUT 10sec
AUTOMATIC SKEW DETECTION 10mm
TOOL CONDITION 1 Condition No. Condition No. 1
SETTING TOOL CB09U
(Condition) SPEED 30
FORCE 14
ACCELERATION 4
ASSIGN TOOL 1
TANGENTIAL MODE OFF
OVERCUT (START) 0
OVERCUT (END) 0
DISTANCE ADJUST OFF
INITIAL DOWN FORCE 0
CUT LINE PATTERN OFF
CONDITION 2 Condition No. Condition No. 2
TOOL PEN
SPEED/FORCE/ACCELERATION 30/12/4
Same as Condition No. 1 from CUT LINE Same as Condition No. 1
PATTERN to INITIAL DOWN FORCE
CONDITION 3 Condition No. Condition No. 3
TOOL CB09U
SPEED/FORCE/ACCELERATION 30/12/4
Same as Condition No. 1 from CUT LINE Same as Condition No. 1
PATTERN to INITIAL DOWN FORCE
CONDITION 4 Condition No. Condition No. 4
TOOL CB09U
SPEED/FORCE/ACCELERATION 20/17/3
Same as Condition No. 1 from CUT LINE Same as Condition No. 1
PATTERN to INITIAL DOWN FORCE
CONDITION 5 Condition No. Condition No. 5
TOOL CB09U
SPEED/FORCE/ACCELERATION 80/14/8
Same as Condition No. 1 from CUT LINE Same as Condition No. 1
PATTERN to INITIAL DOWN FORCE
CONDITION 6 Condition No. Condition No. 6
TOOL CB09U
SPEED/FORCE/ACCELERATION 10/22/2
Same as Condition No. 1 from CUT LINE Same as Condition No. 1
PATTERN to INITIAL DOWN FORCE
CONDITION 7 Condition No. Condition No. 7
TOOL CB15U
SPEED/FORCE/ACCELERATION 5/30/1
Same as Condition No. 1 from CUT LINE Same as Condition No. 1
PATTERN to INITIAL DOWN FORCE
CONDITION 8 Condition No. Condition No. 8
TOOL POUNCE
SPEED/FORCE/ACCELERATION 30/12/4
Same as Condition No. 1 from CUT LINE Same as Condition No. 1
PATTERN to INITIAL DOWN FORCE

* Setting items and initial values may be changed.

A-15
 INDEX

Sign Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

1, 2, 3, 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Confirm the Cutting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Confirm the results of the cutting test. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Connecting to the Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
A
Continuously move manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
About the Default Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
AC line inlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Adjusting for the registration mark scan position. . . . . 5-16
COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Adjusting the blade length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Cross cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27, 7-29
Adjustment for cutting out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Cross Cut Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Adjustment for Half Cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Cross Cut Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Adjustment of offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Cross cut unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Adjustment of Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Cut demo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Adjustment on the media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Cutter blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Adjustment registration mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Cutter blade adjustment magnifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Adjustment when using cutter plunger. . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Cutter blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Adjustment when using plotting pen. . . . . . . . . 2-45, 13-21
Cutter plunger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Adjust the blade length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Cutter Plunger Exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Adjust the blade length manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Cutter plunger nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Adjust with 2POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Cutting area when adjusting the registration mark. . . . 5-6
Adjust with 3POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Cutting groove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Adjust with 4POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Cutting mat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
ADV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
CUTTING PRO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Aligning the push roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Cutting test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43, 13-19
Angle control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Apparel Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 D
ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25, 5-2 Daily maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
ARMS Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9 DATA DUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Attaching a pen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7 Default screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Attaching a tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 17-5 DIAGNOSTICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-25
Attaching the Perforating Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Display language setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Automatic detection of registration mark position. . . . . 5-7 Display Length Unit Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Automatic Pre Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4, 8-6, 15-7 DISTANCE ADJUST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Axis adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
AXIS ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 6-5 E
Enabling/Disabling the ' : ' and ' ; ' commands. . . . . . . 11-5
B ENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
BARCODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Error Messages in GP-GL Command Mode. . . . . . . . 16-6
Basket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Error Messages in HP-GL Command Mode. . . . . . . . . 16-7
Beep setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 ESC/CROSS CUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Blade application and features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 EXPAND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Blade Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
F
C Fan suction setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Change the cutting condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Feed Speed for Pre Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing the hold-down force. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Flange guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Check the lines of registration mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Flange guide stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
CIRCLE RESOLUTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Flange set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Communication Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
COND/TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 2-26

I-1
G O
Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Operation key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
GP-GL command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
GP-GL separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 ORIGIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
GP-GL STEP SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Grit roller position guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 2-16 P
Grit rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Panel Cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Paper core for take-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
H Pause key select setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
HP-GL command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 PAUSE/MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
HP-GL MODEL EMULATED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Pen holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
HP-GL separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Pen station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 17-7
POSITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
I Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Power cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
I/F (LAN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Power switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Initial Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 Pre Feed of Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Installation space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII Printing the Setting of the Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Priority of tool condition selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Push roller hold-down force switching lever. . . . . . . . . 1-5
Push rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
L Push roller sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
LANGUAGE SELECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
LCD contrast setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 R
LENGTH UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Raise or Lower the Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
LINK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Reading the error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-26
Loading Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Reading the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Recommended setting of registration mark. . . . . . . . . 5-10
M Registration mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4, 5-6
Main Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Registration Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Manual position adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 6-4 Registration mark automatic detection. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
MARK SCAN Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Removing a pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 5-6 Removing the Perforating Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
MEDIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Removing the tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 17-6
Media flange for take-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5 Replacing Cutter Blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Media guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4 Replacing the Cross Cut Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Media sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 10-4 Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Media set lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Roller lock plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Media stocker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Roll media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Media stopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 18-9 ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Media that registration mark cannot be detected. . . . . 5-7 RS-232C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
MENU Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 RS-232C interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 RS-232C interface connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Model ID response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Mounting the stock shafts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 S
Move away the tool carriage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Selecting Tool Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Move in steps manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Self Diagnostic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-24
Move the Tool Carriage and Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 SELF TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
MOVING SPEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Sensor guard bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Set the enlarge/shrink scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
N Setting Adjustment Between the Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Network (LAN) interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Setting and Adjustment of ARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Network (LAN) Interface connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Setting a Separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Nomenclature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Setting a Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

I-2
Setting Cut Line Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Tool holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 2-5, 17-5
Setting cutting area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 TOOL UP HEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Setting cutting width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Tool up movement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Setting Feeding Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Setting Initial Blade Control Position Adjust. . . . . . . . . 7-19 U
Setting length of the page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 UP MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Setting mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 USB cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Setting of the Initial Down Force. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Setting origin point when HP-GL is set. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 USB interface connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Setting Paper Exposure Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 USB memory dedicated connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Setting Rear Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 User Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Settings for Cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Setting speed of the registration mark scan. . . . . . . . 5-25 W
Setting step movement distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Water-based fiber pen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Setting the acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Water-based fiber pen adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Setting the command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 When media change mode is OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Setting the Cutting Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 When Media Change Mode is OFF and
Setting the DHCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Cross Cut is ON.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Setting the force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 When media change mode is ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Setting the length of overcut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Setting the Number of Pre Feeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Setting the OFFSET FORCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Setting the Origin Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Setting the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Setting the step size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Setting the tangential mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Setting the tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Setting the tool condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Setting tool No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
SETUP MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Sheet media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Skew Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
SLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Software Activation Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Sorting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Start Mark Auto Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
STEP PASS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Stock shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Stop Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Stopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Subnet mask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

T
Take-up roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Take-up sensor unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Tangential mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Test pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Test Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Test the registration mark sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
TO ENSURE SAFE AND CORRECT USE Cutter. . . . . 1-2
TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Tool carriage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

I-3
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FC9000 Series User's Manual

FC9000-UM-151
JUNE 20, 2019 1st edition-01
GRAPHTEC CORPORATION